Contents

Nissan Altima v15 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 559
1 of 559

Summary of Content for Nissan Altima v15 Owner's Manual PDF

2020 ALTIMA SEDAN OWNERS MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Owners Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement revises or adds to the following information within the 2019 Qashqai, 2020 Altima and 2020 Rogue Owners Manual:

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS in the Illustrated table of contents section WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS in the Instruments

and controls section WARNING LIGHTS in the WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE

REMINDERS section in the Instruments and controls section INDICATOR LIGHTS in the WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE

REMINDERS section in the Instruments and controls section

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: August 2019 Publication No. SU20EA 0T32U0

or

Brake warning light (red)

2

or

Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)

3

or Brake warning light (red)

or Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)

WARNING LIGHTS or Brake warning

light (red) This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the park- ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional infor- mation, refer to Brake fluid in the Do- it-yourself section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.

Pressing the brake pedal with the en- gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis- tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)

The electronic parking brake system warn- ing light functions for the electronic park- ing brake system. If the warning light illumi- nates, it may indicate the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to Parking brake in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS or Electronic parking

brake indicator light (red) (if so equipped)

This light illuminates when the electronic parking brake system is operating.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates. When the engine is started and the parking brake is released, the warning light turns off.

If the parking brake is not released, the electronic parking brake warning light re- mains illuminated. Ensure the electronic parking brake warning light has turned off before driving.

If the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates or flashes while the electronic parking brake system warning light or (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to Parking brake in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highwaymotor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you un- derstand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book- let explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The Maintenance and schedules section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re- solve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights un- der your states lemon law.

When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to de- livery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your ve- hicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con- cerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- cessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your ve- hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe op- eration of your vehicle.

WARNING IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!

NEVER drive under the influence of al- cohol or drugs.

ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle fea- tures or taking other actions that could distract you.

ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap- propriate child restraint systems. Pre- teen children should be seated in the rear seat.

ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety fea- tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

FOREWORD READ FIRSTTHEN DRIVE SAFELY

ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety, emissions or du- rability and may even violate govern- mental regulations. In addition, dam- age or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di- agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for ex- ample remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war- ranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your ve- hicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of pro- duction, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or in- stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra- tions in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, perfor- mance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- sions of vehicle Owners Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owners Manual, contact NISSAN

Consumer Affairs. For contact information, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO- GRAM page in this Owners Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

WARNING This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or seri- ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be fol- lowed precisely.

CAUTION This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illus- tration.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat- teries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: Per- chlorate Material special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/.

SiriusXM services require a subscrip- tion after trial pe- riod and are sold separately or as a package. The sat- ellite service is available only in the 48 contiguous USA and DC. SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.

2019 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me- chanical, photocopying, recording or oth- erwise, without the prior written permis- sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please con- tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:

Your name, address, and telephone number

Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side)

Date of purchase

Current odometer reading

Your NISSAN dealers name

Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the informa- tion at:

For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of Contents

Illustrated table of contents

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10

1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-23) 2. Rear seat belts with pretensioner(s)

for outboard seating (P. 1-12) 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)

4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)

5. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7) 6. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-12, 1-46)

7. Side-impact pressure sensor (drivers side shown; passengers side similar) (P. 1-46)

8. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-46) 9. Front seats (P. 1-2) 10. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P. 1-46) 11. Rear seats (P. 1-2) 12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system (P. 1-23) 13. Rear outboard seat-mounted side

impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2583

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power windows (P. 2-61) 2. Windshield (P. 8-19) 3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-43) 4. Engine hood (P. 3-22) 5. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-11) 6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-45) Turn signal switch (P. 2-45)

7. Headlight switch (P. 2-45) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) (P. 2-50) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-25)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-30) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-30)

9. Mirrors (P. 3-30) Side view camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11)

10. Door locks (P. 3-4) NISSAN Intelligent Key (P. 3-7) Keys (P. 3-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2559

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch (P. 2-44)

2. Trunk lid (P. 3-23) 3. Sonar sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-175) 4. Rearview camera (P. 4-3) 5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-25) 6. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-25)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)

7. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LIC4027

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-64)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-29) 3. Interior lights (P. 2-65) 4. HomeLink Universal Transceiver

(if so equipped) (P. 2-67) Rearview mirror (P. 3-30)

5. Glove box (P. 2-57) 6. Cup holders (P. 2-57)

Console box (P. 2-57) 7. Rear armrest (P. 1-2)

Cup holders (P. 2-57) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2563

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-28) 2. Steering wheel switches for audio

control* Vehicle information display controls (P. 2-19)

3. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-45) Paddle shifters (if so equipped) (P. 5-18)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Horn (P. 2-52)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-9) Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-43) 7. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-29,

4-36) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

8. Navigation system* (if so equipped) Audio system*

LII2584

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)

10. Passenger supplemental knee airbag (P. 1-46)

11.. Glove box (P. 2-57) 12. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-46) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-56) USB connection port (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-41) Aux jack*

14. Cup holders (P. 2-57) 15 Shift lever (P. 5-18) 16. Electronic parking brake switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-25) Automatic brake hold switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-25)

17. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13)

18. Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-62) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-65) Bluetooth Hands-free Phone System* ProPILOT Assist Switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-89)

19. Driver supplemental knee airbag (P. 1-46)

20. Hood release (P. 3-22) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25) Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls (P. 3-28)

21. Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-4) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-45) Steering assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-54) Trunk opener (P. 3-23)

*: For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect Owners Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

KR20DDET engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 2. Drive belt location (P. 8-17) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 5. Battery (P. 8-14) 6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21) 7. Air cleaner (P. 8-18) 8. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) 9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI3260

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

PR25DD engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 2. Drive belt location (P. 8-17) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 4. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) 5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 6. Battery (P. 8-14) 7. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21) 8. Air cleaner (P. 8-18) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI3261

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning light

Name Page

or

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

2-10

Automatic Emer- gency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped)

2-10

Automatic Emer- gency Braking (AEB) with Pedes- trian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)

2-11

or

Brake warning light

2-11

Warning light

Name Page

Charge warning light

2-11

Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)

2-12

Engine oil pres- sure warning light

2-12

Low tire pressure warning light

2-12

Master warning light

2-14

Power steering warning light

2-14

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped)

2-15

Warning light

Name Page

Seat belt warning light and chime

2-15

Supplemental air bag warning light

2-15

Indicator light

Name Page

All Wheel Drive (AWD) AUTO indi- cator light (if so equipped)

2-15

Automatic brake hold indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

2-16

Automatic brake hold indicator light (white) (if so equipped)

2-16

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator light

Name Page

or

Electronic parking brake indicator light (red) (if so equipped)

2-16

Front fog light in- dicator light (if so equipped)

2-16

Front passenger air bag status light

2-16

High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

2-16

High beam indi- cator light (blue)

2-16

Malfunction Indi- cator Light (MIL)

2-17

Indicator light

Name Page

Security indicator light

2-17

Side light and headlight indica- tor light (green)

2-18

Slip indicator light 2-18

Turn signal/ hazard indicator lights

2-18

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

2-18

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

1 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment (if so equipped for passengers seat). . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment (for drivers seat and if so equipped for passengers seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Center armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7

Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12 Seat belt warning light and chime . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15

Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-31 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-67 Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-67

WARNING Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and re- ceive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, refer to Precautions on seat belt us- age in this section.

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

Do not leave children unattended in- side the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in se- rious accidents.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unat- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is re- clined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for passengers seat) Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu- ally. For additional information about ad- justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or back- ward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback for- ward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seat- back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional informa- tion, refer to Precautions on seat belt us- age in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS3029 LRS3030

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for drivers seat and if so equipped for passengers seat)

Operating tips

WARNING Before driving the vehicle, return the seatback to an upright seating position after manually releasing it. Also, make sure the seat is locked in place. Failure to do so may cause the seat to move in a collision or sudden stop. This may result in damage to the seat or personal injury.

The power seat motor has an auto- reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the en- gine is off. This will discharge the bat- tery.

Forward and backward Moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional informa- tion, refer to Precautions on seat belt us- age in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2662

1-4 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat lifter (drivers seat) Move the switch as shown to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (if so equipped for drivers seat) The lumbar support feature provides ad- justable lower back support to the driver. Push the switch as shown to adjust the seat lumbar area.

FOLDING REAR SEAT Interior trunk access

LRS2636 LRS2270

LRS3156

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

The trunk can be accessed from the driver side and passenger side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

1. Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position.

2. Open the access cover on the rear par- cel shelf.

3. Insert a key or another suitable tool (such as a pen or a screw driver) into the slot, then slide the recessed lever in the direction of the arrow 1 .

4. Fold down the passengers side seat- back 2 .

NOTE:

To access the trunk in case of a dead battery, use a key or another suitable tool (such as a pen or screw driver), to slide recessed lever in the direction of the arrow.

WARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in seri- ous injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched po- sition. If they are not completely se- cured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

LRS3157

1-6 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To fold down either side of the rear seat, open the trunk and pull on the knob on that side A .

CENTER ARMREST Pull the armrest down as shown.

WARNING Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end colli- sions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach any- thing to the head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly ad- just the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may in- crease the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

LRS3163 WRS0167

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

The illustration shows the seating posi- tions equipped with head restraints/headrests.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be inte- grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position.

The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single lock- ing notch to secure them to the seat frame.

Proper Adjustment:

For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the cen- ter of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest.

If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2695 LRS2300

1-8 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

INSTALL 1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch (notches) 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob 2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

ADJUST For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

1-10 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Raise To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

Lower To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supple- mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

WARNING Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

SSS0136 SSS0016

SEAT BELTS

1-12 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

WARNING Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal inju- ries in an accident.

SSS0134 SSS0014

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- curely fastened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.

Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.

If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

All seat belt assemblies, including re- tractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any colli- sion. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was mi- nor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or im- proper operation is noted.

All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the re- straint manufacturers inspection in- structions and replacement recom- mendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT AND CHIME The driver and front passenger seat is equipped with an enhanced seat belt re- minder function. If your vehicle is equipped with an enhanced seat belt reminder func- tion, a visual and audible alert will operate if a driver or front passenger seat belt is un- buckled at speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more under the following con- ditions:

If the driver seat belt is not fastened.

LRS0786

1-14 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The front passengers seat belt is not fastened and the seat is occupied by a passenger for 7 seconds after the igni- tion switch is placed in the ON position.

The front passengers seat belt is not fastened and objects or external force on the passenger seat change the seat belt reminder classification to Occu- pied.

The seat belt warning light will flash under the conditions shown above until the nec- essary seat belt is securely fastened.

A warning chime will sound for approxi- mately 90 seconds or until one of the fol- lowing conditions is met:

The unbuckled front occupants seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt reminder function in the front passenger seat no longer detects that the front passenger seat is occu- pied.

The ignition is turned off or the vehicle is placed in P (Park).

The below situations could result in the seat belt reminder light being illuminated and the chime sounding, even with no oc- cupant present in the passenger seat:

Heavy objects placed on the seat.

Someone pushing or pulling on the front passenger seat.

An object placed under the front pas- senger seat.

An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

An object hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.

PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific rec- ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and re- ceive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re- tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode acti- vated, the child can be seriously in- jured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Fastening the seat belts 1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to Seats in this section.

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped for passengers seat)

LRS3029

1-16 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re- tractor and insert the tongue into the buckle A until you hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

Power front seat shown (for drivers seat and if so equipped for passengers seat) LRS2662 LRS2674

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips B as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack C . Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation:

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex- tend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re- turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, re- fer to Child restraints in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During nor- mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is ac- tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the op- eration of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section.

WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be cer- tain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

LRS2675

1-18 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle 1 . The seat belt automati- cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:

When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor

When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:

Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for- ward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service or to learn more about seat belt operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats) The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, refer to Precau- tions on seat belt usage in this section. To adjust, pull out the adjustment button 1 and move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position 2 , so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the ad- justment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

WARNING After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may re- duce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The ex- tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.

Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

Never use seat belt extenders to in- stall child restraints. If the child re- straint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec- ommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be re- placed.

1-20 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re- tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re- lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re- lease the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly re- strained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, includ- ing doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organiza- tions. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re- straint systems:

Rear-facing child restraints

Forward-facing child restraints

Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward- facing child restraints are available for chil- dren who outgrow rear-facing child re- straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING Infants and children need special pro- tection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- ting seat belt could cause serious or fa- tal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to Child re- straints in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve- hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, refer to Child restraints in this section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental re- straint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional informa- tion, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) in this section.

CHILD SAFETY

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- facturers instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as pos- sible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu- facturers instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommen- dations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturers instruc- tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufac- turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward- facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle por- tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

Are the childs back and hips against the vehicle seatback?

Is the child able to sit without slouch- ing?

Do the childs knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?

Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

Is the child able to use the properly ad- justed head restraint/headrest?

Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

1-22 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If you answered no to any of these ques- tions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa- tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always fol- low all of the child restraint manu- facturers instructions for installa- tion and use.

Infants and children should never be held on anyones lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.

Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.

NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward- facing child restraint in the front seat, refer to Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts in this section.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could se- riously injure or kill a child. A rear- facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

Be sure to purchase a child re- straint that will fit the child and ve- hicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.

Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum- stances are they to be used to at- tach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child re- straint anchorages. The child re- straint will not be properly in- stalled using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be se- riously injured or killed in a collision.

Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts, or other items.

A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.

Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- sible after fitting the child restraint.

Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.

WRS0256

1-24 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col- lision, loose objects can injure occu- pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attach- ments that can be connected to these an- chors. For additional information, refer to LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child re- straints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

Choose only a restraint with a label cer- tifying that it complies with Federal Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana- dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehi- cles seat and seat belt system.

If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjust- ments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your childs height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.

If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).

If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installa- tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the ve- hicle is being operated. Canadian law re- quires the top tether strap on forward- facing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special an- chor points that are used with LATCH sys- tem compatible child restraints. This sys- tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve- hicles seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instruc- tions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use and installa- tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the loca- tions shown in the illustration.

Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position us- ing the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

Inspect the lower anchors by in- serting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured prop- erly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child re- straint will not be properly installed us- ing the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH system anchor locations LRS2165

1-26 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- ments that can be connected to two an- chors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH lower anchor location LRS3036

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment LRS0662

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Top tether anchor point locations The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments or seat belts. For additional information, refer to Installing top tether strap in this sec- tion.

WARNING Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child re- straint will not be properly installed us- ing the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

If you have any questions when install- ing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Anchor points 1 are located on the rear parcel shelf.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com- bined weight of the child and the child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower an- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:

LRS3095

1-28 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Type A (if so equipped):

Remove the plastic covers from the LATCH anchors by pulling the covers straight back. Store the covers in a se- cure area.

Type B (if so equipped):

Lift the flap of the material to expose the LATCH anchors.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manu- facturers instructions.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor at- tachments to the LATCH lower an- chors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

Type A (if so equipped) step 1 LRS3118

Type B (if so equipped) step 1 LRS3140

Rear-facing webbing-mounted step 3 LRS2997

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to com- press the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the re- straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using

Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 3 LRS2996

Rear-facing step 4 LRS0673

Rear-facing step 6 LRS0674

1-30 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve- hicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 6.

8. Type A (if so equipped):

If you remove the child restraint, rein- stall the plastic LATCH anchor covers after use by pushing the covers straight onto the LATCH anchors.

Type B (if so equipped):

If you remove the child restraint, se- curely replace the flap by pressing the material firmly against the seat.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com- bined weight of the child and the child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower an- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child re- straint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully re- tracted.

Rear-facing step 1 WRS0256

Rear-facing step 2 WRS0761

Rear-facing step 3 LRS2395

1-32 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rear- ward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the re- straint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear-facing step 4 LRS2396

Rear-facing step 5 WRS0762

Rear-facing step 6 LRS2397

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

7. Check to make sure that the child re- straint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com- bined weight of the child and the child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower an- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward- facing child restraint using the LATCH sys- tem:

1. Type A (if so equipped):

Remove the plastic covers from the LATCH anchors by pulling the covers straight back. Store the covers in a se- cure area.

Type B (if so equipped):

Lift the flap of the material to expose the LATCH anchors.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manu- facturers instructions.

Type A (if so equipped) step 1 LRS3118

Type B (if so equipped) step 1 LRS3140

1-34 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Secure the child restraint anchor at- tachments to the LATCH lower an- chors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to Installing top tether strap in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re- quire the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

4. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat- back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- rect child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted step 3

LRS2995 Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 3

LRS2994

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

5. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to com- press the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

6. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the re- straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the re- straint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the

vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

8. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 7.

9. Type A (if so equipped):

If you remove the child restraint, rein- stall the plastic LATCH anchor covers after use by pushing the covers straight onto the LATCH anchors.

Type B(if so equipped):

If you remove the child restraint, se- curely replace the flap by pressing the material firmly against the seat.

Forward-facing step 5 LRS0671

Forward-facing step 7 WRS0697

1-36 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1 Top tether strap

2 Anchor point

Installing top tether strap The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi- tions only).

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, re- moval and installation, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 1 over the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point 2 as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

If you have any questions when install- ing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child re- straint will not be properly installed us- ing the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Rear bench seat LRS3176

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front pas- senger air bag. For additional informa- tion, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section. For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com- bined weight of the child and the child re- straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- bined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower an- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward- facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passen- ger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manu- facturers instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat- back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- rect child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For ad- ditional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, re- moval and installation, refer to Head restraints/headrests in this section.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) step 1

WRS0699

1-38 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat in- stallation only). For additional informa- tion, refer to Installing top tether strap in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re- quire the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing step 3 WRS0680

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child re- straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rear- ward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

Forward-facing step 4 LRS0667

Forward-facing step 5 LRS0668

Forward-facing step 6 WRS0681

1-40 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the re- straint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 4 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illu- minated, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

Forward-facing step 8 WRS0698

Forward-facing step 10 LRS3091

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

1 Top tether strap

2 Anchor point

Installing top tether strap The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, re- moval and installation, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 1 over the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point 2 as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap 1 over the seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point 2 as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to re- move any slack.

If you have any questions when install- ing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- straints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child re- straint will not be properly installed us- ing the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in- structions outlined in this section.

Rear bench seat LRS3176

1-42 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or col- lision greatly increases:

Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the childs face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.

Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the childs arm.

A booster seat must only be in- stalled in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dard 213.

Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehi- cles seat and seat belt system.

LRS2479 LRS0453

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

Make sure the childs head will be prop- erly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the childs ears, a high back booster seat should be used.

If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various ad- justments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the ve- hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us- ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the Child safety, Child restraints and Booster seats sec- tions of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0464

1-44 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manu- facturers instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- rect high back booster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information about head restraint/headrest adjustment, re- moval and installation, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the childs hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manu- facturers instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the childs shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturers instructions for adjust- ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- structions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three-point type seat belt with retractor in this section.

WRS0699 Front passenger position

LRS0454

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front pas- senger air bag status light may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. For additional infor- mation, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS This SRS section contains important infor- mation concerning the following systems:

Driver and front passenger supplemen- tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System)

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag

Rear outboard seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bag

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag

Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and rear outboard seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys- tem

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact col- lisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- pacted.

Rear outboard seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the rear outboard seat passengers in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.

LRS3091

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

1-46 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags

This system can help cushion the impact force to the drivers and front passengers knees in certain collisions.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger and rear seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional informa- tion, refer to Seat belts in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents

The front passenger air bag and pas- senger knee air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit. For additional information, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section.

WRS0031

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sit- ting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unre- strained, leaning forward, sitting side- ways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.

The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sen- sors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then in- flates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can in- crease the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sen- sor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and passen- ger knee air bag OFF under some con- ditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in this section.

Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

1-48 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

WARNING Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly re- strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

1-50 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seri- ously injure or kill your child. For addi- tional information, refer to Child re- straints in this section.

WARNING Front and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:

The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

WARNING The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front and rear seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

WARNING When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be espe- cially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Do not use seat covers on the front or rear seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

LRS3119 WRS0032

1-52 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0162 SSS0159

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System 1. Top tether strap anchor

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag infla- tors

3. Rear seat belts

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag

5. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag

6. Head restraints/headrests

7. Front seat belts

8. Side-impact pressure sensor (drivers side shown; front passengers side similar)

9. Supplemental front-impact air bags

10. Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags

11. Seats

12. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

13. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats shown; rear outboard seats simi- lar)LRS3090

1-54 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

14. Satellite sensors

15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system

16. Satellite sensors

17. Rear outboard seat-mounted side- impact supplemental air bags

WARNING To ensure proper operation of the pas- sengers NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem, please observe the following items.

Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket.

Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.

Make sure that there is nothing press- ing against the rear of the seatback, such as a child restraint installed in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor.

Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.

Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

If a forward facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag may de- ploy in a collision. Also the front pas- senger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional information about installing and using child re- straints, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.

Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.

If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described in this section, get the oc- cupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your passenger seat occu- pant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supple- mental air bag warning light may flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is de- signed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not in- flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- cation of proper front air bag system op- eration.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi- cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op- eration is based on the severity of a colli- sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classifi- cation sensor is also monitored. Based on information from the sensor, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi- tionally, the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag may be automati- cally turned off under some conditions, de- pending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illumi- nated. For additional information, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in

this section. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a dis- ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- tact information is contained in the front of this Owners Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the re- lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- tion and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce seri- ous injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide re- straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can in- crease the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

1-56 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING The front passenger air bag and pas- senger knee air bag are designed to au- tomatically turn OFF under some condi- tions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt, and child restraints is necessary for most effective protec- tion. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts, and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of in- jury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag on or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indi- cated by the front passenger air bag status light which is located on the instru- ment panel. After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illumi- nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION PASSENGER AIR BAG

STATUS LIGHT ( ) FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG AND PASSENGER KNEE AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody Bag or Child or Child Restraint or

Small Adult in front passenger seat

ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects placed on the front passenger seat may also cause the light to operate as de- scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information, refer to Normal operation and Troubleshooting in this section.

LRS3091

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as de- scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu- lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requir- ing the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in accor- dance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula- tions is on the seat, its weight and the childs weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag and pas- senger knee air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for ex- ample, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- propriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classifica- tion sensor is designed to operate as de- scribed above to turn the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a colli- sion or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. For additional information about proper use and installation, refer to Child restraints in this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the objects weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag infla- tion, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, con- trary to the instructions in this manual. Al- ways be sure that you and all vehicle occu- pants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front pas- senger air bag and passenger knee air bag are automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illu- minated (indicating that the front passen- ger air bag and passenger knee air bag are OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status

1-58 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

light may or may not be illuminated, de- pending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicat- ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occu- pant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposi- tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. This is nor- mal system operation and does not indi- cate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- ger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the me- ter and gauges area of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passen- ger based on weight, please follow the pre- cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.

Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the Seats section of this manual. Sit upright, lean- ing against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet com- fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the Seat belts section of this manual. Front passenger seat belt buckle sta- tus is monitored by the occupant clas- sification system, and is used as an in- put to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly recommended that the front passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check- ing the front passenger air bag status light.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

NOTE:

This vehicles occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the clas- sification locked during driving, so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor may recalculate the weight of the occupant under some con- ditions (both while driving and when stopped), so front passenger seat occu- pants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:

Occupant is a small adult the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag and passenger knee air bag are suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet com- fortably extended to the floor.

A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

An object placed under the front pas- senger seat.

An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Re- start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following con- ditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and cen- tered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.

The child restraint is not properly in- stalled, as outlined in the Child re- straints section of this manual.

An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

1-60 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.

Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.

An object placed under the front pas- senger seat.

An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Re- start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be re- positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passen- ger and no objects on the front pas- senger seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos- sible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions

WARNING Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steer- ing wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous pro- jectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.

Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or front end struc- ture. This could affect proper opera- tion of the front air bag system.

Tampering with the front air bag sys- tem may result in serious personal in- jury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instru- ment panel assembly by placing ma- terial over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by in- stalling additional trim material around the air bag system.

Removing or modifying the front pas- senger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in seri- ous personal injury.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing ma- terial on the seat cushion or by install- ing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front pas- senger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occu- pant classification sensor (weight sensor).

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag system. It is also rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Re- straint System (SRS) wiring har- nesses* should not be modified or dis- connected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.

A cracked windshield should be re- placed immediately by a qualified re- pair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identifica- tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Front and rear outboard seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side- impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front and rear out- board seats. The curtain air bags are lo- cated in the side roof rails. All of the infor- mation, cautions and warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, al-

LRS3142

1-62 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

though they may inflate if the forces in an- other type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are de- signed to inflate on the side where the ve- hicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- ments (for example, during severe off- roading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi- cate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest and pelvic area of the front and rear outboard occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear

outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How- ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver, front passenger and rear outboard occupants seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finish- ers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during in- flation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front and rear seats. Also, do not place any objects (an um- brella, bag, etc.) between the front and rear door finisher and the front and rear seat. Such objects may be- come dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflate.

Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system com- ponents will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag or damage to the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

Tampering with the side air bag sys- tem may result in serious personal in- jury. For example, do not change the front and rear seats by placing mate- rial near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of elec- trical equipment. The SRS wiring har- nesses* should not be modified or dis- connected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identifica- tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the drivers and passengers side. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in an- other type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.

Drivers side LRS2599

1-64 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper knee air bag opera- tion.

When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita- tion and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

The knee air bag helps to cushion the im- pact force on the knees of the driver and passenger. It can help reduce serious inju- ries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body.

The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occu- pant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time.

The knee air bag operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING Do not place any objects between the

knee bolster and the drivers or pas- sengers seat. Such objects may be- come dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.

Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to pre- vent damage to or accidental inflation of the knee air bag system.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.

Tampering with the knee air bag sys- tem may result in serious personal in- jury. For example, do not change the driver or passenger knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.

Passengers side LRS3093

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equip- ment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or discon- nected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the knee air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identifica- tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and rear outboard seats)

WARNING The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re- placed together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the preten- sioner system checked and, if neces- sary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental acti- vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper- ing with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the preten- sioner system.

If you need to dispose of the preten- sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- posal procedures could cause per- sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- comes involved in certain types of colli- sions, helping to restrain front and rear out- board seat occupants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an- chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

1-66 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- leased and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi- cate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- ing condition should get fresh air promptly. After the pretensioner(s) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release web- bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in this section. If the opera- tion of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the preten- sioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

1. SRS air bag warning labels (located on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag sys- tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

LRS2163 LRS0100

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:

The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 sec- onds.

The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and re- paired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys- tems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only ba- sis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light re- mains illuminated after inflation has oc- curred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags, pretension- er(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the mainte- nance. The ignition switch should always be placed in the LOCK position when work- ing under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur-

tain air bag or knee air bag has in- flated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated preten- sioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in- spected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the ve- hicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If you need to dispose of the supple- mental air bag or pretensioner sys- tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom- mended that you contact a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- posal procedures could cause per- sonal injury.

1-68 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the im- pact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Distance To Empty (DTE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Variable Compression Turbo (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Resetting the drive computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Oil control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Vehicle information display indicators . . . . . . . 2-30 Vehicle information display warnings . . . . . . . . 2-33

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-53 Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 E-call (SOS) button (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Front-door pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Overhead sunglasses storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Power moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67 HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67

Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-68 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69 Operating the HomeLink Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . 2-70 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 If your vehicle is stolen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

1. Vents (P. 4-28) 2. Steering wheel switches for audio

control* Vehicle information display controls (P. 2-19)

3. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-45) Paddle shifters (if so equipped) (P. 5-18)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-46) Horn (P. 2-52)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-9) Vehicle information display (P. 2-19)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-43) 7. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-29,

4-36) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-53)

8. Navigation system* (if so equipped) Audio system*

LII2584

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-46)

10. Passenger supplemental knee airbag (P. 1-46)

11.. Glove box (P. 2-57) 12. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-46) Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-56) USB connection port (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-41) Aux jack*

14. Cup holders (P. 2-57) 15 Shift lever (P. 5-18) 16. Electronic parking brake switch

(if so equipped) (P. 5-25) Automatic brake hold switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-25)

17. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13)

18. Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-62) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-65) Bluetooth Hands-free Phone System* ProPILOT Assist Switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-89)

19. Driver supplemental knee airbag (P. 1-46)

20. Hood release (P. 3-22) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-25) Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls (P. 3-28)

21. Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-4) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-45) Steering assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-54) Trunk opener (P. 3-23)

*: For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect Owners Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Tachometer 2. Warning and indicator lights 3. Vehicle information display

Odometer Twin trip odometer

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER This vehicle is equipped with a speedom- eter and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter clus- ter. The odometer is located within the ve- hicle information display.

LIC4029

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Speedometer The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer and the twin trip odometer 1 are displayed in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis- tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET switch 2 on the left side of the instrument panel to change the display as follows:

Odometer Mileage Trip Trip Odometer Mileage

Resetting the trip odometer Push the TRIP RESET switch 2 until the desired trip odometer (Trip or Trip ) is displayed. Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 2 for more than 1 second resets the currently dis- played trip odometer to zero.LIC2218 LIC2921

Instruments and controls 2-5

TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine into the red zone 1 .

CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant tempera- ture is within the normal range 1 when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driv- ing conditions.

CAUTION If the gauge indicates coolant tempera- ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is over- heated, continued operation of the ve- hicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual for immediate action required.

LIC4085 LIC3538

2-6 Instruments and controls

FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak- ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af- ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning message shows in the vehicle information display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- isters 0 (Empty). The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the drivers side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the ve- hicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in this section.

DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE) Displays the estimated distance the ve- hicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consump- tion.

Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the ac- tual distance that can be driven.

DTE display will change to --- when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).

NOTE:

The DTE value after refill is estimated based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added.

If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated.

Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the esti- mated DTE value (city/highway driv- ing, idle time, remote start time, ter- rain, seasonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).

LIC2222

Instruments and controls 2-7

VARIABLE COMPRESSION TURBO (if so equipped) Your engine is equipped with a variable compression ratio system called Variable Compression Turbo. This system can vary the engine compression ratio continu- ously.

According to driving conditions, the system applies optimum compression ratio auto- matically to achieve both high output and high fuel economy efficiency.

This is not a physical gauge. It is a display option in the vehicle information display that can be selected. For additional infor- mation, refer to Vehicle information dis- play in this section.

1 Compression ratio status display Displays the status of compression ra- tio controlled by Variable Compression Turbo. The lowest compression ratio (8:1) and the highest (14:1) are displayed as Power and ECO respectively.

2 Turbo charger boost pressure gauge Displays the turbo charger boost pres- sure.

NOTE:

Under some conditions, the compres- sion ratio may not change. This is not a malfunction of the system.

CAUTION If the Variable Compression Turbo be- comes faulty, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. For additional information, refer to Malfunction Indi- cator Light (MIL) in this section.

LIC4236

2-8 Instruments and controls

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

Power steering warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped)

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped)

High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)

Seat belt warning light and chime High beam indicator light (blue)

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Charge warning light All Wheel Drive (AWD) AUTO indicator light (if so equipped)

Security indicator light

Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)

Automatic brake hold indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Engine oil pressure warning light Automatic brake hold indicator light (white) (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light or Electronic parking brake indi- cator light (red) (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Master warning light Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-9

CHECKING LIGHTS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

, , , , , or The following lights (if so equipped) come on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , ,

or , If any light fails to come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- function. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis- played in the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachom- eter. For additional information, refer to Ve- hicle information display in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indicators, refer to Vehicle information display in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without anti- lock assistance. For additional information, refer to Brake system in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light

This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It illumi- nates briefly and then turns off.

This light illuminates when the AEB system is set to OFF in the vehicle information dis- play.

If the light illuminates when the AEB sys- tem is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, re- fer to Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

2-10 Instruments and controls

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.

This light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is set to OFF in the vehicle information display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection and Intelligent Forward Colli- sion Warning (I-FCW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the park- ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not ap- plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol- lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional infor- mation, refer to Brake fluid in the Do- it-yourself section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.

Pressing the brake pedal with the en- gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis- tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging sys- tem is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, or missing, or if the light remains on, have the system checked.

Instruments and controls 2-11

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle bat- tery may not charge completely. For additional information, refer to Vari- able voltage control system in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Do not continue driving if the genera- tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Electronic parking brake warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)

The electronic parking brake system warn- ing light functions for the electronic park- ing brake system. If the warning light illumi- nates, it may indicate the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to Parking brake in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during nor- mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to Engine oil in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

CAUTION Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not cov- ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- tors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illumi- nate. A Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning also appears in the vehicle in- formation display.

When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information la- bel located in the drivers door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- flated to the recommended pressure,

2-12 Instruments and controls

the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illumi- nated.

For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in this section, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving and In case of emer- gency sections of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ- ences before use.

If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and in- crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se- rious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could re- sult in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure show on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label located in the drivers door opening to turn the low tire pres- sure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjust- ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly in- flated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pres- sure warning light will flash for ap- proximately 1 minute. The light will re- main on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.

If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.

Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display.

No key warning

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

Parking brake release warning

Door/trunk open warning

Loose fuel cap

Low tire pressure warning

Power steering warning light

WARNING If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as- sist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine run- ning, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illumi- nates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering is not function- ing properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illu- minates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

2-14 Instruments and controls

For additional information, refer to Power steering in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual.

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) warning light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.

This light illuminates when the RAB system is turned off in the vehicle information dis- play.

If the light illuminates when the RAB sys- tem is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, re- fer to Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten the driver and front passenger seat belts.

For additional information, refer to Seat belts in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual.

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 sec- onds.

The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple- mental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly. For additional details, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supple- mental restraint system section of this manual.

WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag sys- tems and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as pos- sible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in this section.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) AUTO indicator light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion, the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) AUTO indica- tor light illuminates.

If the master warning light comes on dur- ing operation, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-15

Automatic brake hold indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

The automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates while the automatic brake hold system is operating.

For additional information, refer to Auto- matic brake hold in the Starting and driv- ing section of this manual.

Automatic brake hold indicator light (white) (if so equipped)

The automatic brake hold indicator (white) illuminates when the automatic brake hold system is on standby.

For additional information, refer to Auto- matic brake hold in the Starting and driv- ing section of this manual.

or Electronic parking brake indicator light (red) (if so equipped)

This light illuminates when the electronic parking brake system is operating.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates. When the engine is started and the parking brake is released, the warning light turns off.

If the parking brake is not released, the electronic parking brake warning light re- mains illuminated. Ensure the electronic parking brake warning light has turned off before driving.

If the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates or flashes while the electronic parking brake system warning light (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to Parking brake in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi- nates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, refer to Fog light switch in this section.

Front passenger air bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal restraint system section of this manual.

High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the high beams selected. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.

For additional information, refer to Head- light and turn signal switch in this section.

High beam indicator light (blue)

This blue light comes on when the head- light high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control mal- function.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emis- sion control system malfunction exists. If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, refer to Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

MIL on steady An emission control system malfunction has been de- tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel- filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

MIL blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system dam- age:

do not drive at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h).

avoid hard acceleration or decelera- tion.

avoid steep uphill grades.

if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or AUTO ACC posi- tion.

The blinking security indicator light indi- cates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.

For additional information, refer to Security systems in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlight position is selected. For additional informa- tion, refer to Headlight and turn signal switch in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the Ve- hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is op- erating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after ap- proximately 2 seconds if the system is op- erational. If the light does not come on have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC is turned off in the vehicle information display. This indicates the VDC has been turned off.

Turn the VDC on using the vehicle informa- tion display, or by restarting the engine. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system in the Start- ing and driving section of this manual.

The VDC light also comes on when the ig- nition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will turn off after a period of time if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the indi- cator light while you are driving, have the VDC system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice.

WARNING VDC should remain on unless freeing a vehicle from mud or snow.

While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys- tem working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo- tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de- pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.

2-18 Instruments and controls

NISSAN Intelligent Key door buzzer The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional infor- mation, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

Vehicle settings

Drive computer information

Drive system warnings and settings (if so equipped)

Cruise control system information

Variable Compression Turbo informa- tion (if so equipped)

NISSAN Intelligent Key operation infor- mation

Indicators and warnings

Tire pressure information

Audio information

Compass and navigation information (if so equipped)

ProPILOT (if so equipped)

Driving Aids

Odometer/twin trip odometer

Distance to empty

Clock and outside temperature LIC3224

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-19

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY The vehicle information display can be

changed using the , , and OK buttons located on the

steering wheel.

1 - Use these buttons to navigate the vehicle infor- mation display.

2 OK - Change or select an item in the vehicle information display.

3 Returns to the previous menu.

The OK, and buttons also control audio and control panel functions in some conditions. Most screens and menus offer instruction prompts of the steering switch buttons to indicate how to control the vehicle information display. Dots on the right side of the vehicle infor- mation display will appear if there is more than one page of menu items or warning messages. The OK button changes the au- dio source and the buttons also control voice recognition manual mode. The OK button can be used to change the audio source when the audio screen is displayed. The but- tons can be used when controlling voice recognition prompts manually. For addi- tional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect Owners Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY When the vehicle in placed in the ON posi- tion the vehicle information display may display the following screens (if so equipped):

Home

Drive Computer Speed, Fuel Economy, Trip Distance & Time

Convenience

Tire Pressure

Variable Compression Turbo

Speed Limit Sign

Compass and Navigation

Audio/telephone

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

ProPILOT

Driving Aids

Settings

Warnings*

*Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display warnings and indicators in this section.

To control what items display in the vehicle information display, refer to How to use the vehicle information display in this section.

RESETTING THE DRIVE COMPUTER The drive computer is divided across three screens:

Average Speed

Average Fuel Economy

LIC3566

2-20 Instruments and controls

Trip Distance & Time

1. Press the but- tons until you reach the desired drive computer mode.

2. Press and hold the OK button for ap- proximately 1 second to reset the infor- mation on the currently displayed screen.

NOTE:

If you wish to reset all drive computer values at once, press and hold the OK button for approximately 3 seconds until a reset menu appears; and follow the in- structions.

OIL CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped) The oil control system can be accessed in the Maintenance portion of the vehicle in- formation display settings.

Engine oil information informs the distance to oil change. Never exceed one year or 7,500 miles (12000 km) between oil change intervals for the KR20DDET engine or 10,000 miles (16000 km) between oil change intervals for the PR25DD engine.

Display when ignition is ON

Display timing Action Re- quired

Engine Oil Ser- vice due in xxx miles

Remaining oil life is less than 940 miles (1500 km).

Plan to have your vehicle serviced.

Engine Oil Ser- vice due

Remaining oil life is 0 miles (0 km).

Have your ve- hicle serviced within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

The oil change interval cannot be adjusted manually.

The distance to oil change interval is calcu- lated depending on the driving conditions and set automatically by the oil control sys- tem. A reminder will be displayed when ap- proaching the end of the service interval.

When the Factory Reset option is selected in the vehicle information display, the oil control system will also be reset to initial value. Please change the engine oil when Factory Reset is selected.

CAUTION If the oil replacement indicator is dis- played, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

Operating the vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine.

To reset oil control system:

1. Push ignition button to ON position.

2. Push the and buttons lo- cated on the steering wheel until Set- tings displays in the vehicle informa- tion display. Use the buttons to select Maintenance. Then, press the OK button.

3. Select the Oil Control System and press the OK button.

4. Press the OK button according to the reset instructions displayed at the bot- tom of the Oil Control System mainte- nance screen.

For additional information, refer to Oil con- trol system in the Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-21

SETTINGS The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle infor- mation display. It also allows you to change vehicle functions:

VDC Setting

Driver Assistance

TPMS Setting

Clock

Vehicle Settings

Maintenance

Customize Display

Unit/Language

Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped)

Factory Reset

VDC Setting The VDC Setting menu allows the user to enable or disable the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

Menu item Result System Allows the user turn the VDC system on or off. For additional information, refer to Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Driver Assistance The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the settings for driving, parking, and braking aids.

Menu item Result Steering Assist (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Steering Assist of the ProPILOT Assist system on or off. For additional information, please

refer to ProPILOT Assist in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Emergency Brake Displays available emergency braking options.

Front Allows user to turn the front emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) , Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection and Intelligent For- ward Collision Warning (I-FCW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Rear (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the rear emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to Rear Auto- matic Braking (RAB) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Lane (if so equipped) Displays available lane options. Lane Departure Warning Allows user to turn the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to Lane

Departure Warning (LDW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Lane Departure Prevention (if so equipped)

Allows user to turn Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system on or off. For additional information, refer to Intelli- gent Lane Intervention (I-LI) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Blind Spot (if so equipped) Displays available blind spot options. Blind Spot Warning Allows user to turn the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system on or off. For additional information, refer to Blind Spot

Warning (BSW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Side Indicator Brightness Allows user to change the brightness of the side indicator.

Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Speed Limit Sign recognition on or off. For additional information, refer to Traffic Sign Rec- ognition in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids. Auto Show Sonar Allows user to auto display the sonar. For additional information, refer to Rear Sonar System (RSS) in the Starting

and driving section of this manual. Rear Allows user to turn the rear sonar on or off. Distance Allows user to set the distance sensor range to Long/Medium/Short.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Menu item Result Volume Allows the user to set the parking sensor volume to High/Medium/Low.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, refer to Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Driver Attention Alert Allows user to turn the Intelligent Driver Alertness on or off. For additional information, refer to Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert. Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off. Chassis Control Displays available chassis control options.

Active Trace Control Allows user to turn the Intelligent Trace Control system on or off. For additional information, refer to Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

TPMS Setting The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result TPMS Setting Displays available TPMS settings.

Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.

Clock

Menu item Result Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that

can be made include automatically setting the time, 12H/24H format, Daylight Saving Time, time zone, and manually setting the time. The clock can also be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect Owners Manual.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, lock- ing, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result Lighting Displays the available lighting options.

Welcome Headlight (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off. Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Accent Lighting (if so equipped) Allows user to adjust the accent lighting brightness. Auto Headlight (if so equipped) Allows user to change when the auto headlights activate based on the exterior brightness. Light Off Delay (if so equipped) Allows user to change the length of time the exterior lights remain on.

Turn indicator Displays the available turn indicator options. 3 Flashes (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. Continuous (if so equipped) Allows user to adjust the continuous feature.

Locking Displays the available locking options. Ext Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is

activated. Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the drivers door is unlocked after the

door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the drivers or front passengers side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 5 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Auto Door Unlock Displays the auto door unlock options. Shift to P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). IGN OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked.

Horn beeps on lock Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.

Wipers Displays the available wiper options.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Menu item Result Speed Dependent Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off.

Driving Position (if so equipped) Displays the available driving position options. Exit Seat Slide Allows the user to turn the exit seat slide on or off. When turned on, this feature will move the drivers seat

backward for an easy exit when the ignition is turned off and the drivers door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the drivers seat will move to the previous set position. For additional information, refer to Automatic drive positioner in the Pre-driving checks and ad- justments section of this manual.

Rear Door Alert Displays the available Rear Door Alert options. For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert in this section.

Horn & Alert When selected, the alert is displayed and horn sounds. Alert Only When selected, only the alert is displayed. OFF When selected, no alert or horn will be active.

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely. For additional information, refer to Remote Engine Start in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Maintenance The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle mainte- nance items.

WARNING The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, in- cluding tire pressure checks. For addi- tional information, refer to Changing wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual. Many factors in- cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be re- placed. Setting the tire replacement in- dicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pres- sure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.

Menu item Result Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options.

Oil Control System Allows user to reset the current interval. This should only be done after completing oil change maintenance. Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Customize Display The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that ap- pears in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result Main Menu Selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display.

Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Blank Allows user to turn the blank on or off in the vehicle information display. Audio (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the audio controls screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Chassis Control (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Cruise (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the cruise control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Speed Limit Sign (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the speed limit sign screen on or off in the vehicle information display. TPMS (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the TPMS screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Variable Compression Turbo (if so equipped)

Allows user to turn the Variable Compression Turbo screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Speed Allows user to turn the speedometer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display.

Auto Turn Notification (if so equipped) Allow user to turn the auto turn notification alerts on or off. Cruise Screen Transition (if so equipped) Allow user to turn the cruise screen transition on or off. Welcome Effect (if so equipped) Displays the available welcome effect settings.

Gauges Allows user to turn the gauges effect on or off. Animation Allows user to turn the animation effect on or off.

Light/Wiper Guidance (if so equipped) Displays the available light and wiper guidance settings. Lights mode guidance Allows user to turn the light mode guidance on or off. Wiper mode guidance Allows user to turn the wiper mode guidance on or off.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Unit/Language The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle in- formation display.

Menu item Result Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Tire Pressure Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Changing the tire pressure units will also change the

units displayed for the Variable Compression Turbo (if so equipped). Temperature Allows user to select the temperature display units. Language Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.

Key-Linked Settings (if so equipped)

Menu item Result Key-Linked Settings Allows user to turn the Key-Linked Settings on or off. For additional information, refer to Memory storage

function (key-link) in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display set- tings to factory status.

Menu item Result Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,

the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-29

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY INDICATORS

Indicator Name

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) emer- gency warning indica- tor

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if so equipped)

Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

Drive sport mode indi- cator (if so equipped)

Intelligent Lane Inter- vention (I-LI) indicator (if so equipped)

Lane Departure Warn- ing indicator (if so equipped)

Indicator Name

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) indicator (if so equipped)

Steering Assist Alert (if so equipped)

Steering Assist indica- tor (if so equipped)

Transmission Shift po- sition indicator

Vehicle ahead detec- tion indicator

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) emergency warning indicator This indicator illuminates along, with an au- dible warning, when the system detects the possibility of a forward collision.

For additional information, refer to Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) and Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- destrian Detection in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the BSW system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to Blind Spot Warning (BSW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the cruise control sys- tem status.

When cruise control is activated, a green circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle information display will also display the speed the cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed. If cruise control is on and canceled, the speed will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle will return to if the resume but- ton is activated.

Drive sport mode indicator (if so equipped)

A small S appears to the right of the Trans- mission Shift Position indicator in the ve- hicle information display when the drive sport mode is engaged.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Activate the drive sport mode by pushing the switch on the shift lever while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position.

For additional information, refer to Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual.

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indi- cator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the I-LI system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to Intelli- gent Lane Intervention (I-LI) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the LDW system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator illuminates to indicate the status of the Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) system. For additional information, refer to

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) in the Start- ing and driving section of this manual.

Steering Assist Alert (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Steer- ing Assist system is engaged.

It will be displayed under the following con- dition:

When not holding the steering wheel or when there is no steering wheel opera- tion

Please hold on the steering wheel immedi- ately. When the steering operation is de- tected, the warning turns off and the steer- ing assist function is automatically restored.

Steering Assist indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the Steering Assist system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to ProPI- LOT Assist in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual.

Transmission Shift Position indicator

This indicator shows the transmission shift position.

Vehicle ahead detection indicator

This indicator shows when the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system is en- gaged and has detected a vehicle.

For additional information, refer to Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) or Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- destrian Detection in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-31

LIC4297

2-32 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS

1. No Key Detected

2. Key ID Incorrect

3. Key Battery Low

4. Key System Error: See Owners Manual

5. Key Registration Complete

6. Shift to Park

7. Push ignition to OFF

8. Push brake and start switch to drive

9. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

10. Release Parking Brake

11. Low Fuel

12. Loose Fuel Cap

13. Engine Oil Service due in miles

14. Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

16. Door Open

17. Trunk Open

18. Low Outside Temperature

19. Power will turn off to save the battery

20. Power turned off to save the battery

21. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

22. Headlight System Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

23. Parking Sensor Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

24. Driver Attention Alert Malfunction

25. Malfunction: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

26. Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

27. Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature (if so equipped)

28. Time for a break?

29. Driver Attention Alert Take a Break?

30. Malfunction (if so equipped)

31. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

32. Not Available: Parking Brake On (if so equipped)

33. Rear Door Alert is activated

34. Check Rear Seat For All Articles

35. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indica- tors (if so equipped)

36. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for ve- hicles with ProPILOT Assist) indicators (if so equipped)

37. Speed Limit Sign indicator (if so equipped)

38. Chassis Control System Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

39. Not Available System Malfunction (if so equipped)

40. Not Available: Seat Belt Not Fastened (if so equipped)

41. Not Available: Front Radar Blocked (if so equipped) or Forward Driving Aids Tem- porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

42. Currently not available (if so equipped)

43. Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if so equipped)

44. AWD Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

45. AWD High Temp. Stop Vehicle (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-33

46. AWD Tire Size Incorrect: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

47. CVT (AT) Malfunction Service Now (if so equipped)

48. Service CVT (AT) Power reduced (if so equipped)

49. Unavailable: High Camera Tempera- ture (if so equipped)

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- tion switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

Key Battery Low

This indicator illuminates when the Intelli- gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat- tery with a new one. For additional infor- mation, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Key System Error: See Owners Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for a period of time and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- tem. If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Key Registration Complete

This appears when a new Intelligent Key is registered to the vehicle.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine.

Push ignition to OFF

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illu- minates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC position when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ig- nition switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK position.

Push brake and start switch to drive

This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator also appears when the ve- hicle has been started using the Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) function.

2-34 Instruments and controls

This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- telligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key battery dis- charge in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the ve- hicle is driven.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There

will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the ve- hicle has been refueled. For additional in- formation, refer to Fuel-filler cap in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments sec- tion of this manual.

Engine Oil Service due in miles

This distance to oil change is displayed if the distance to oil change is less than 62 miles (100 km).

Low Washer Fluid (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to Windshield-washer fluid in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illumi- nates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long

as the low tire pressure warning light re- mains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- sures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to Low tire pressure warning light in this section and Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Door Open

This warning illuminates when a door has been opened.

Trunk Open

This warning illuminates when the trunk has been opened.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside tem- perature is below 37F (3C). The tempera- ture can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, re- fer to Settings in this section.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This message appears in the vehicle infor- mation display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or the ON

Instruments and controls 2-35

position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, refer to Push- button ignition switch positions in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Power turned off to save the battery

This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For addi- tional information, refer to Push-button ig- nition switch positions in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor- mation, refer to Headlight and turn signal switch in this section.

Headlight System Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional infor- mation, refer to Headlight and turn signal switch in this section.

Parking Sensor Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional infor- mation, refer to Rear Sonar System (RSS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Driver Attention Alert Malfunction

This warning appears when the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system is not func- tioning properly. For additional information, refer to Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Malfunction: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly:

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB)

If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable be- cause a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, refer to Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature (if so equipped)

This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104F (40C). For additional informa- tion, refer to Automatic Emergency Brak- ing (AEB) , Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection , Intelli- gent Cruise Control (ICC) , Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) or Lane Departure Warn- ing (LDW) in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual.

Time for a break?

This message appears when the set time is reached. This time can be set up to six hours. For additional information, refer to Settings in this section.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Driver Attention Alert Take a Break?

This alert appears when the system has detected that the driver may be displaying fatigue or a lack of attention.

Malfunction (if so equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly:

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I- FCW)

If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB), Auto- matic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pe- destrian Detection or Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this

warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, refer to Extended storage switch in this section.

Not Available Parking Brake On (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel- ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) is engaged.

Under the following condition, the ICC (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) system is au- tomatically canceled:

The electronic parking brake is applied.

The above system cannot be used when the electronic parking is activated.

For additional information, refer to "Intelli- gent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) and Parking brake in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Rear Door Alert is activated

When the system is enabled, this message appears when the Rear Door Alert system is active and can remind the driver to check the back seat.

Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select Dismiss Message to clear the display for a period of time. If no selection is made, this message auto- matically turns off after a period of time.

Using the steering wheel switch, a driver can select Disable Alert to disable the horn alert for the remainder of the cur- rent trip.

WARNING Selecting Dismiss Message during a stop within a trip temporarily dismisses the message for that stop without turn- ing the system off. Alerts can be pro- vided for other stops during the trip. Se- lecting Disable Alert turns off the Rear Door Alert system for the remainder of a trip and no audible alert will be provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en- ables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to How to use the vehicle information display in this section.

For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-37

Check Rear Seat For All Articles

When the system is enabled, this message appears when the vehicle comes to a com- plete stop, the vehicle is transitioned from the D (Drive) position to P (Park) position, and the driver exits the vehicle. This mes- sage alerts the driver, after a period of time, to check for items in the rear seat after the audible alert has been provided.

NOTE:

This system is disabled until a driver en- ables it using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to How to use the vehicle information display in this section.

For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert in this section.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indica- tors (if so equipped)

These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The sta- tus is shown by color. For additional infor- mation, refer to Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for ve- hicles with ProPILOT Assist) indicators (if so equipped)

These indicators show the ProPILOT Assist with Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. The status is shown by color. For additional information, refer to Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPI- LOT Assist) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Speed Limit Sign indicator (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Traffic Sign Recognition system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Chassis Control System Error: See Own- ers Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears if there is an error in the Automatic Brake Hold system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to Chassis control or Automatic brake hold in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Not Available System Malfunction (if so equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

ProPILOT

Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI)

If one or more of these warnings appear, have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to "Intelli- gent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with- out ProPILOT Assist) , ProPILOT Assist , Blind Spot Warning (BSW) , Lane Depar- ture Warning (LDW) or Intelligent Lane In- tervention (I-LI) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel- ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system is engaged.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Under the following condition, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist) system is automatically canceled:

When the drivers seat belt is not fas- tened

The above system cannot be used when the drivers seat belt is not fastened.

Not Available: Front Radar Blocked (if so equipped) or Forward Driving Aids Tem- porarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

This message appears when the front ra- dar sensor may be obstructed due to:

mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc.

inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc)

All forward driving aids are temporarily dis- abled until the system detects that the front radar sensor is no longer obstructed.

For additional information, refer to the fol- lowing in the Starting and driving section of this manual:

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for ve- hicles without ProPILOT Assist)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for ve- hicles with ProPILOT Assist)

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I- FCW)

Currently not available (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel- ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system , the ICC system or the Intel- ligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is en- gaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist) , the ICC system or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys- tem is automatically canceled:

When the VDC operates

When a wheel slips

When the VDC system is turned off

The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates, wheel slip and VDC system is off.)

Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intel- ligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system , the ICC system or the Intel- ligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) system is en- gaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC (with ProPILOT Assist) , the ICC system or the Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) sys- tem is automatically canceled:

When the VDC operates

When a wheel slips

The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.)

AWD Error: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the all-wheel drive system is not functioning properly while the engine is running.

AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle (if so equipped)

This warning may appear while trying to free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driving mode may change to 2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warn-

Instruments and controls 2-39

ing is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the warning turns off, you can con- tinue driving.

AWD Tire Size Incorrect: See Owners Manual (if so equipped)

This warning may appear if there is a large difference between the diameters of the front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn.

CVT (AT) Malfunction Service now (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warn- ing comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Service CVT (AT) Power reduced (if so equipped)

This transmission has a high fluid tem- perature protection mode. If the fluid tem- perature becomes too high (for example, climbing steep grades in high tempera- tures with heavy loads, such as when tow- ing a trailer), engine power and, under

some conditions, vehicle speed will be de- creased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelera- tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be reduced.

WARNING When the high fluid temperature pro- tection mode operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal op- eration; or have it repaired if necessary.

Unavailable: High Camera Temperature (if so equipped)

This message appears when the camera detects an interior temperature of more than 104F (40C). For additional informa- tion, refer to Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:

Vehicle security system

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors or trunk when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detec- tion type system that activates when a ve- hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-40 Instruments and controls

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo- nents in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec- tion, such as component locks, identifica- tion markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and spe- cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insur- ance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows and the moonroof. The system can be armed even if the windows and moonroof are open.

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve- hicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch, or power door lock switch..

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes on. The indicator stays il- luminated for a period of time indicat- ing that the system is in the pre-armed phase. The indicator light will blink every 3 seconds once the security system is armed. If during the pre-armed phase one of the following occurs, the system will not arm:

Any door is unlocked with the Intelli- gent Key or door request switch.

The ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC or ON position.

Even when the driver and/or passen- gers are in the vehicle, the system will activate when all the doors, hood and trunk are locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the AUTO ACC or ON position, the sys- tem will be released.

Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.

The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by pressing the button on the Intelli- gent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

opening the door or trunk without using Intelligent Key (even if the door is un- locked by releasing the door inside lock knob switch).

How to stop an activated alarm The alarm stops only by unlocking a door by pressing the button on the Intelli- gent Key or pushing the request switch on the drivers or passengers door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle.

Instruments and controls 2-41

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an auto- mated toll road device or automatic pay- ment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON position for approximately 5 sec- onds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the in- terference) separate from the regis- tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

Security indicator light The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or AUTO ACC position.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

LIC0474

2-42 Instruments and controls

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as soon as possible. Please bring all regis- tered keys that you have. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concen- trates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con- centrates with water to the manufac- turers recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield- washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid con- centrate and water.

LIC4238

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-43

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in- terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In ap- proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

1 Intermittent intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A (faster) orB (slower).

2 Low continuous low speed opera- tion

3 High continuous high speed opera- tion

Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 5 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

To defrost the rear window glass and out- side mirrors (if so equipped), place the igni- tion switch in the ON position and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio sys- tem.

LIC4039

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR (if so equipped) DEFROSTER SWITCH

2-44 Instruments and controls

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH Lighting

1 Rotate the switch to the position, and the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on. The will illuminate in the me- ter.

2 Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

Type A (if so equipped) LIC2634

Type B (if so equipped) LIC2635

Type C (if so equipped) LIC4237

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-45

CAUTION Use the headlights with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Autolight system The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The auto- light system can:

Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.

Turn off all the lights when it is light.

Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted. For additional information, re- fer to Vehicle information display in this section. To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position 1 .

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF (if so equipped), , or position.

LIC2636

2-46 Instruments and controls

Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top side 1 of the instrument panel. The au- tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicles battery could become dis- charged.

Headlight beam select 1 To select the high beam function, push

the lever forward. The high beam lights come on and the light illumi- nates in the meter.

2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.

High Beam Assist (if so equipped) The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of ap- proximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle ap- pears in front of your vehicle when the headlight high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automati- cally.

WARNING The High Beam Assist system is a con-

venience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, en- sure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manu- ally when necessary.

The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the fol- lowing conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually.

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).

When a light source similar to a headlight or tail light is in the vicin- ity of the vehicle.

LIC0836 LIC2637

Instruments and controls 2-47

When the headlights of the on- coming vehicle or the leading ve- hicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to for- eign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.

When there is a sudden, continu- ous change in brightness.

When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.

When driving on a road with many curves.

When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.

When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is re- flecting intense light.

When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.

When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, be- ing towed, etc.

The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations.

The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.

The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the lead- ing vehicle.

When only one light on the oncom- ing vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.

When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.

Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).

The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.

High Beam Assist operation

To activate the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the AUTO po- sition 1 and push the lever forward 2

(high beam position). The High Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will illumi- nate while the headlights are turned on. If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC3696

2-48 Instruments and controls

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the head- light uses the low beam.

To turn off the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the posi- tion or select the low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral position.

Ambient image sensor maintenance The ambient image sensor 1 for the High Beam Assist system is located in front of the inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the high beam assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the windshield clean.

Do not attach a sticker (including trans- parent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is lo- cated on the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Battery saver system (if so equipped) If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will turn off after a period of time.

CAUTION Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LSD2712

Instruments and controls 2-49

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (if so equipped) The LED DRL automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position. When you turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination, the LED lights switch from LED DRL to the park function. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi- nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch ON for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain OFF while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your head- lights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL Press the + button to increase the bright- ness of instrument panel lights.

Press the - button to decrease the bright- ness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH Turn signal

1 Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels au- tomatically.

Lane change signal

2 Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

LIC3176 LIC2638

2-50 Instruments and controls

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

NOTE:

The 3 flash pass feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to Ve- hicle information display in this section.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the fog light switch to the position. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the position. To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to oper- ate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are se- lected.

LIC2639

Instruments and controls 2-51

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the steering wheel.

WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat tempera- tures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is not running.

Do not use the seat heater for ex- tended periods or when no one is us- ing the seat.

Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in dam- age to the heater.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.

If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC3568 LIC3973

HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- sition.

2. Push the switch until either two lights are illuminated for high setting, or one light is illuminated for low setting.

The heater is controlled by a thermo- stat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will re- main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch to turn it off. Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68F (20C), the system will heat the steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a temperature above 68F (20C). The indicator light will remain on as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel system off manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

Once activated, your heated steering wheel will automatically turn on and off to maintain a temperature above 68F (20C).

When the temperature of the steering wheel is above 122F (50C) and the heated steering wheel switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This does not in- dicate a malfunction.

LIC4030

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-53

The Steering Assist switch is used to en- able and disable the Steering Assist sys- tem that is activated using the settings menu of the vehicle information display.

The Steering Assist system controls the steering system, when ProPILOT Assist is engaged, to help keep your vehicle near the center of the lane when driving. For additional information, refer to ProPILOT Assist and Intelligent Lane Intervention (I- LI) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

The E-call (SOS) button is used in combina- tion with a NissanConnect Services sub- scription to call for assistance in case of an emergency.

The E-call button is under a cover. Press the cover once 1 . The cover will drop down, exposing the E-call button.

Pressing the button 2 will (with a paid sub- scription) reach a response specialist that will provide assistance based on the situa- tion described by the vehicles occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your ve- hicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect or call 8554266628.

The Rear Door Alert system functions un- der certain conditions to indicate there may be an object or passenger in the rear seat(s). Check the seat(s) before exiting the vehicle.

The Rear Door Alert system is initially dis- abled. The driver can enable the system using the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to Vehicle in- formation display warnings and indicators in this section.

LIC4101 LIC4213

STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped)

E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON (if so equipped)

REAR DOOR ALERT

2-54 Instruments and controls

When the system is enabled:

The system is activated when a rear door is opened and closed within 10 minutes of the vehicle being driven. When the driver door is closed and the system is activated, a visual message appears in the vehicle information dis- play. For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert is activated in this sec- tion.

If a rear door is opened and closed but the vehicle is not driven within approxi- mately 10 minutes, the system will not be activated. A rear door must be opened and closed and the car driven within 10 minutes for the system to ac- tivate.

When the Rear Door Alert system is acti- vated:

When the driver puts the vehicle in the P (Park) position, a notification message appears in the vehicle information dis- play with the options to Dismiss Mes- sage or Disable Alert if desired.

Select Disable Alert to temporarily disable for that stop.

No selection or Dismiss Message will keep the alert enabled for that stop.

If the alert is enabled when a driver exits the vehicle, a message will appear in the vehicle information display that states Check Back Seat For All Articles.

If Horn & Alert setting is selected:

An audible horn sound will occur af- ter a short time unless a rear door is opened and closed within a short time to deactivate the alert.

If the doors are locked before the alert is deactivated by opening a rear door, the horn will sound.

If the trunk is opened before a rear door is opened, the horn will be de- layed until after the trunk is closed.

NOTE:

If Alert Only setting is selected, the message alert will still be shown in the vehicle information display but the horn will not sound.

WARNING If the driver selects Disable Alert, no

audible alert will be provided regard- less of rear door open/close status.

There may be times when there is an object or passenger in the rear seat(s) but the audible alert does not sound. For example, this may occur if rear seat passengers enter or exit the ve- hicle during a trip.

The system does not directly detect objects or passengers in the rear seat(s). Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indi- cating that there may be something in the rear seat(s).

NOTE:

There may be times when the horn sounds but there are no objects or pas- sengers in the rear seat(s).

For additional information, refer to Rear Door Alert is activated in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-55

The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. It is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The power outlet is powered only when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or ON position.

CAUTION The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

Only certain power outlets are de- signed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power out- let for an accessory lighter. For addi- tional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the ve- hicle battery.

Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights, or rear window defroster is on.

Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal tem- perature fuse may open.

When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

Instrument Panel LIC3345 LIC4040

POWER OUTLET EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

2-56 Instruments and controls

The extended storage switch is used when shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

FRONT-DOOR POCKETSPulled position LIC3266

Pushed position LIC3268 LIC4088

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-57

SEATBACK POCKETS The seatback pockets may be located on the back of the drivers and/or passengers seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING To ensure proper operation of the front passengers NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), please observe the following items:

Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/head rest.

Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/head rest or in the seatback pocket.

GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the master key when locking 1 or unlocking 2 the glove box.

WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

LIC1328 LIC2300

2-58 Instruments and controls

CONSOLE BOX To open the console box, press in on the lever 1 and raise the lid 2 .

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES STORAGE To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the drivers view and to help prevent an accident.

CAUTION Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

Do not leave sunglasses in the sun- glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

LIC4091 LIC4034

Instruments and controls 2-59

CUP HOLDERS The rear center cup holders are located in the rear fold-down armrest.

WARNING Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.

Do not use bottle holder for open liq- uid containers.

Front LIC4032

Rear LIC2297

Soft bottle holder (front) LIC4089

2-60 Instruments and controls

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadver- tent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the as- sistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- perature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig- nition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the drivers or passengers door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock switch 2. Power door lock switch 3. Front passenger side switch 4. Right rear passenger side switch 5. Left rear passenger side switch 6. Drivers side automatic switch

Soft bottle holder (rear) LIC4090 LIC3208

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-61

Drivers side power window switch The drivers side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the de- tent and continue to hold up until the de- sired window position is reached.

Front passengers power window switch The passengers window switch operates only the corresponding passengers win- dow. To open the window partially, push the switch down lightly until the desired win- dow position is reached. To close the win- dow, pull the switch up until the desired window position is reached.

Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down 1 . To close the window, pull the switch up 2 .

Locking passengers windows When the window lock switch is depressed, only the drivers side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

LIC4228 LIC2663

2-62 Instruments and controls

Automatic operation To fully open a window equipped with au- tomatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and re- lease it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the win- dow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with au- tomatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically closes all the way. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse function If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.

The auto-reverse function can be acti- vated when the window is closed by auto- matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv- ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- tion may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING There are some small distances imme- diately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., in- side the vehicle before closing the window.

When power window switch does not operate If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initial- ize the power window system:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed.

4. Release the power window switch. Op- erate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. The power window auto- matically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up func- tion is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.

If the power window function does not op- erate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LIC0410

Instruments and controls 2-63

POWER MOONROOF The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The power moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the AUTO ACC or OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof To fully open or close the moonroof, push the switch to the open 1 or close 2 posi- tion and release it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically open or close all the

way. To stop the roof, push the switch once more while it is opening or closing.

Tilting the moonroof To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the switch 3 and release it; it need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the tilt down position 2 .

Resetting the moonroof switch If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initial- ize the moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to the close position 2 .

2. Push and hold the switch to the close position 2 for approximately 15 sec- onds.

3. Release the switch after the moonroof moves up, down, then back to the full tilt up position.

4. Push and hold the switch to the close position 2 .

5. Release the switch after the moonroof completes one full cycle from the tilt up position to the closed position, then to the open position, and again to the fully closed position.

6. Check if the moonroof switch operates normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle serviced. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof) The auto-reverse function can be acti- vated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- sition or for a period of time after the igni- tion switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv- ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- tion may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.

LIC4249

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-64 Instruments and controls

WARNING There are some small distances imme- diately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., in- side the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the moon- roof.

WARNING In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.

Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before opening.

Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close Have your moonroof checked and re- paired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

1 The interior light can be turned ON re- gardless of door position. The light will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- sition when any door is opened.

LIC4033

INTERIOR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-65

2 The interior lights can be set to operate when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a door is open, push the switch, the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door posi- tion. The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or the drivers door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after a period of time when the doors are open.

NOTE:

The step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch po- sition. These lights will turn off auto- matically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- sult in a discharged battery.

MAP LIGHTS To turn the map lights on, push the switches. To turn them off, push the switches again.

CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- sult in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.

LIC4035 LIC4041

2-66 Instruments and controls

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after a period of time if the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

For additional information, refer to Exterior and interior lights in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver pro- vides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand- held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

Will operate most radio frequency de- vices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.

Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is discharged or is dis- connected, HomeLink will retain all programming.

When the HomeLink Universal Trans- ceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming pro- cedures (Example: new vehicle pur- chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional infor- mation, refer to Programming HomeLink in this section.

WARNING Your vehicles engine should be

turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver. For additional information, refer to Push-button ignition switch in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re- verse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot de- tect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet cur- rent federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-67

During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc., that you are programming.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion (without starting the engine) when programming HomeLink. It is also rec- ommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the de- vice being programmed to HomeLink for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 13 in (28 cm) away from the HomeLink surface, keeping the HomeLink indicator light 1 in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and hand-held transmitter but- ton. DO NOT release until the HomeLink indicator light 1 flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indi- cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)

LIC2365 LIC4095

2-68 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in Programming HomeLink for Cana- dian customers and gate openers in this section.

3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the in- dicator light.

If the indicator light 1 is solid/continuous, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

If the indicator light 1 blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de- vice. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, lo- cate the learn or smart button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually lo- cated near where the hanging an-

tenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door openers manual.

5. Press and release the learn or smart button.

NOTE:

Once the button is pressed, you have ap- proximately 30 seconds to initiate the next step.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink but- ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to three times to complete the training process. HomeLink should now acti- vate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- 3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to tim- eout in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- culties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Training proce- dures, replace Programming HomeLink step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener com- ponents.

1. For additional information, refer to Pro- gramming HomeLink step 1 in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-69

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink button while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink indi- cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release un- til the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indi- cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing in- dicates successful training. Proceed with Programming HomeLink step 3 to complete. If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, sim- ply press and release the appropriate pro- grammed HomeLink Universal Trans- ceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being trans- mitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit- ter of the device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

Replace the hand-held transmitter bat- teries with new batteries.

Position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface.

Press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

Position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmit- ter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION The following procedure clears the pro- grammed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How- ever, individual buttons can be repro- grammed. For additional information, refer to Reprogramming a single HomeLink button in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. 2-70 Instruments and controls

HomeLink is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming HomeLink - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with Pro- gramming HomeLink - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 18003553515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver but- ton has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink button that was just pro- grammed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink but- tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink. Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional infor- mation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Uni- versal Transceiver with your new trans- mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re- ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-71

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic door locks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 3-6 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 NISSAN Intelligent Key operation. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-19 Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Interior trunk access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-32 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Memory storage function (switch) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

1. Intelligent Keys (two sets) 2. Mechanical key 3. Key number plate (one plate) NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicles Intelligent Key system com- ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Since the registra- tion process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when reg- istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli- gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.

CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the Intelli- gent Key:

Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key. Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object. Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key. Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

LPD2875

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- mation regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key The Intelligent Key contains the mechani- cal key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors and glove box.

For additional information, refer to Doors in this section and Storage in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key in- stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-off When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechani- cal key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to Stor- age in the Instruments and controls sec- tion of this manual.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS You can only drive your vehicle using the Intelligent Keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com- ponents in your vehicle.

The mechanical key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex- isting key can be duplicated without know- ing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af- ter the registration process, these compo- nents will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not

given to the dealer at the time of registra- tion will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical tran- sponder, to come into contact with wa- ter or salt water. This could affect sys- tem function.

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintention- ally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.

Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows and/or inad- vertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others and/or pets un- attended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY To lock the door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle 1 . This will only lock the corresponding door and will not activate the security sys- tem. To arm the security system, press the button on the Intelligent Key. To unlock the corresponding door using the mechanical key, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle 2 . This will only unlock the corresponding door and will not disarm the security system.

For additional information, refer to Security systems in the Instruments and controls section of this manual

Drivers side LPD2919

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position 1 , then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (drivers or front passen- gers side) to the lock position 1 . When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (drivers or front pas- sengers side) to the unlock position 2 .

Lockout protection With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle and any door open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelli- gent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so equipped)

All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h)Inside lock

LPD2862 Door lock switch

LPD2309

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, depending on the option selected in the Vehicle Settings menu.

NOTE:

The Auto Door Unlock feature can be changed using the "Vehicle Settings" menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to Ve- hicle information display in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, es- pecially when small children are in the ve- hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 2 , the door can be opened from the outside or the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position 1 , the door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ- ences before use.

The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and com- munication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an air- plane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key.

LPD2863

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

CAUTION Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehicle.

Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicat- ing with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the In- telligent Key under the following operating conditions:

When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.

When in possession of wireless equip- ment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver or a CB radio.

When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.

When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.

When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.

When the vehicle is parked near a park- ing meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi- tions before using the Intelligent Key func- tion or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies de- pending on the operating conditions, the batterys life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indicator illuminates in the vehicle informa- tion display. For additional information, re- fer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re- ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and per- sonal computer, the battery life may be- come shorter.

For additional information, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of

additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the Intelli- gent Key:

Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.

Do not change or modify the Intelli- gent Key.

Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- mation regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- charged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key systems operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch 1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the oper- ating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelli- gent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2864

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION

Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close dis- tance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.

After locking with the door handle re- quest switch, verify the doors are se- curely locked by testing them.

To prevent the Intelligent Key from be- ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.

Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch within the range of operation.

LPD2554 LPD2865

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Locking doors 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch 1 while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside chime sounds twice.

NOTE:

Request switches for all doors and trunk can be deactivated when the Ext. Door Switch feature is switched to OFF using the Vehicle Settings menu on the vehicle information, re- fer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls sec- tion of this manual.

Doors lock with the door handle re- quest switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position.

Doors lock by pushing the drivers side door handle request switch while any door is open. However, the corre- sponding door locks with the me- chanical key even if any door is open.

Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intel- ligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with an- other Intelligent Key.

WARNING After locking the doors using the re- quest switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these instructions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may de- crease the safety and security of your vehicle.

LPD2887 LPD2165

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

CAUTION When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be- fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.

The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de- tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When the drivers side door is open, the doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automati- cally unlock and the door chime sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli- gent Key is in the same hand that is op- erating the request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION The lockout protection may not func- tion under the following conditions:

When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel.

When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side the glove box or a storage bin.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side the door pockets.

When the Intelligent Key is placed on or under the spare tire area.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch 1 .

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside chime sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch 1 again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors and trunk. The outside chime sounds again.

LPD2887

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically un- less one of the following operations is per- formed within one minute after pushing the request switch:

Opening any door.

Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a pe- riod of time when a door is unlocked and the room light is switched on when the door opens.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:

Placing the ignition switch in the ON po- sition.

Locking the doors with the remote con- trol.

Switching the interior light switch to the OFF position.

Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature to OFF using the Vehicle Settings menu on the vehicle information dis- play.

For additional information, refer to Interior lights in the Instrument and controls sec- tion of this manual.

Opening the trunk lid To open the trunk lid, perform the following:

1. Push the trunk opener switch A for more than 1 second while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

LPD2165 LPD2866

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

1. (remote engine start) button

2. (lock) button

3. (unlock) button

4. (trunk) button

5. (panic) button The remote keyless entry function can op- erate all door locks using the remote key- less function of the Intelligent Key. The re- mote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-

hicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:

When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.

When the doors or the trunk are open or not closed securely.

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- charged.

CAUTION When locking the doors using the Intel- ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

Locking doors 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelli- gent Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

LPD3603

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING After locking the doors using the Intel- ligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. Failure to follow these in- structions may result in inadvertently unlocking the doors, which may de- crease the safety and security of your vehicle.

Unlocking doors 1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once and the drivers door will unlock.

3. Press the button again within 1 minute to unlock all doors and trunk.

NOTE:

The Selective Unlock feature can be changed using the Vehicle Settings menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to Ve- hicle information display in the Instru- ments and controls section of the manual.

All doors will be locked automatically un- less one of the following operations is per- formed within 1 minute after pressing the button:

Opening any doors.

Pushing the ignition switch. The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the inte- rior light switch is in the ON position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following opera- tions:

Placing the ignition switch in the ON po- sition.

Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

Switching the interior light switch to the OFF position.

Switching the Auto Room Lamp feature to the OFF position in the Vehicle Set- tings menu on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to Interior lights in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

Opening windows (if so equipped) The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane- ously open windows equipped with auto- matic operation.

To open the windows, press the button on the Intelligent Key longer than 3 seconds after all doors are un- locked.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key.

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button for longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release button will not operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- ened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

The panic alarm stops when:

It has run for a period of time, or

Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

The request switch on the driver or pas- senger door is pushed and the Intelli- gent Key is in range of the door handle.

Answer back horn feature If desired, the answer back horn feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is deactivated and the button is pressed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice. When the button is pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights nor the horn operates.

NOTE:

If you change the Answer Back Horn fea- ture with the Intelligent Key, the vehicle information display screen will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle information display screen can also be used to change the answer back horn mode. For additional information, refer to Ve- hicle settings in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

To deactivate: Press and hold the and but- tons for at least 2 seconds. The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to con- firm that the answer back horn feature has been deactivated. To activate: Press and hold the and but- tons for at least 2 seconds once more. The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reac- tivated. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is trig- gered.

Intelligent Key button operation light The light blinks only when you press any button on the Intelligent Key. The light illu- mination only signifies that the key fob has transmitted a signal. You may look and/or listen to verify that the vehicle has per- formed the intended operation. The num- ber of blinks identifies each registered key (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for your own identification purposes.

If the light does not blink, your battery may be too weak to communicate to the ve- hicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to

LPD2836

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

be replaced. For additional information re- garding the replacement of a battery, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or

buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to Troubleshooting guide in this section and Vehicle information display in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve- hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif- ferently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engine The Shift to Park warning appears in the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

When opening the drivers door to get out of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears in the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears in the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approxi- mately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

The Shift to Park warning appears in the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC posi- tion and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- sition and place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

The Rear Door Alert warning message appears on the display, the horn sounds three times twice, or a Check Rear Seat for All Articles warning ap- pears on the display.

The Rear Door Alert is activated. Check the back seat for all articles, press the ENTER button to clear the Rear Door Alert warning message.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi- mately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re- quest switch or the button on the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi- mately 2 seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine

The Key Battery Low indicator appears in the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

The Key ID Incorrect warning appears in the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approxi- mately 3 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pressing the ignition switch The Key System Error warning ap- pears on the display.

It warns of a malfunction with the In- telligent Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The button will be on the NISSAN In- telligent Key if the vehicle has Remote En- gine Start. This feature allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle. The following features may be affected when Remote Engine Start is used:

Vehicles with a manual climate control system will default to the last used heating or cooling mode.

Vehicles with an automatic climate control system will default to either a heating or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For additional information, refer to Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section of the manual.

Laws in some local communities may re- strict the use of remote starters. For ex- ample, some laws require a person using Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any re- quirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi- tional information, refer to Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work in this section.

Other conditions can affect the perfor- mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE

WARNING To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave chil- dren, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your ve- hicle. Additionally, the temperature in- side a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

CAUTION When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- charged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intel- ligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the ve- hicle.

LPD2995

REMOTE ENGINE START

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve- hicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE To use the Remote Engine Start feature to start the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the button to lock all doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the button until the turn signal lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle is not within view press and hold the button for at least 2 sec- onds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts:

The parking lights will turn on and re- main on as long as the engine is run- ning.

The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, refer to Ex- tending engine run time in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then push the push-button ignition switch to the ON po- sition before driving. For additional infor- mation, refer to Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in Remote starting the vehicle in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows:

The first 10 minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.

The second 10 minutes will start imme- diately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For ex- ample, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.

Extending engine run time will count to- wards the two Remote Engine Start limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position before the Remote Engine Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following:

Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and press until the parking lights turn off.

Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

The extended engine run time has ex- pired.

The first 10 minute timer has expired.

The engine hood has been opened.

The shift lever is moved out of park. 3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

The ignition switch is pushed without an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:

The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The hood is not securely closed.

The hazard indicator lights are on.

The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

The button is not pressed and held for at least 2 seconds.

The button is not pressed and held within 5 seconds of pressing the lock button.

The brake is pressed.

The doors are not closed and locked.

The trunk is open.

The Key System Error remains solid in the vehicle information display.

The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.

Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.

The vehicle is not in P (Park).

There is a detected registered key al- ready inside of the vehicle.

The Remote Engine Start feature has been switched to the OFF using the Ve- hicle Settings menu on the vehicle in- formation display. For additional infor- mation, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle informa- tion display. For additional information, re- fer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 1 located below the drivers side instru- ment panel; the hood springs up slightly.

2. To open the hood, push the lever 2 underneath the front of the hood up- wards with your fingertips as illustrated and raise the hood.

3. Remove the support rod from the clamp 3 .

4. Insert the support rod 4 into the slot on the passenger side of the hood.

5. When closing the hood, return the sup- port rod to its original position, lower the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release it. This al- lows proper engagement of the hood latch.

WARNING Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. The vehicle should only ever be operated with the hood securely closed.

If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD3011

HOOD

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPENER OPERATION

WARNING Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to Ex- haust gas (carbon monoxide) in the Starting and driving section of the manual.

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

To open the trunk lid perform one of the following after unlocking all doors:

Press the button on the instrument panel.

Press the button on the Intelligent Key.

Push the trunk opener switch A .

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely.

Instrument panel LPD2932

Intelligent Key WPD0364

Trunk opener switch LPD2866

TRUNK LID

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

NOTE:

Request switches for all doors and trunk can be deactivated when the Ext Door Switch setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle informa- tion display. For additional information, refer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of the manual.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously in- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock re- leases and push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk com- partment on the interior of the trunk lid.

INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS The trunk can be accessed from the pas- senger side of the rear seat.

1. Move the front passenger seat to the most forward position.

2. Open the access cover on the rear par- cel shelf.

3. Slide the handle in the direction of the arrow.

4. Fold down the passengers side seat- back.

LPD2081

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in seri- ous injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched po- sition. If they are not completely se- cured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

OPENER OPERATION The fuel-filler door release is located below the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel- filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi- tions. You could be burned or seri- ously injured if it is misused or mis- handled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An in- correct cap can result in a serious mal- function and possible injury. It could also cause the Malfunction Indi- cator Light (MIL) to come on.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

LPD2869

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

Always place the container on the ground when filling.

Do not use electronic devices when filling.

Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.

Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION Do not use a fuel that contains more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For additional information, refer to Fuel recommendation in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

The Loose Fuel Cap warning message will be displayed/warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the Loose Fuel Cap warning message is displayed/warning appears may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Mal- function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi- nate. If the light illuminates be- cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information, refer to Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in the Instruments and controls sec- tion of this manual.

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock- wise to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 1 while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warning The Loose Fuel Cap warning message will be displayed in the vehicle information dis- play when the fuel-filler cap is not tight- ened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. For additional infor- mation, refer to Fuel-filler cap in this section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the OK button on the steering wheel for about 1 second to turn off the Loose Fuel Cap warning after tighten- ing the fuel-filler cap.

LPD2870 LPD3029

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and com- fort. The drivers air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Al- ways sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

TILT OPERATION Pull the lock lever down and hold on until the end of the stroke 1 and adjust the steering wheel up or down 2 to the de- sired position.

Push the lock lever up 1 firmly and hold on until end of stroke to lock the steering wheel in place.

TELESCOPIC OPERATION Pull the lock lever down 1 and adjust the steering wheel forward or backward 3 to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up 1 firmly and hold on until end of stroke to lock the steering wheel in place.

LPD2871

STEERING WHEEL

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor 1 .

2. To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor 2 from the center mount and swing the visor to the side.

3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as needed 3 .

CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original position.

Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward. VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the mirror cover is open.

WPD0344

LPD2589

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) Use the night position 1 to reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position 2 when driving in daylight hours.

WARNING Use the night position only when neces- sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The inside mirror is designed so that it au- tomatically dims during night time condi- tions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen- sors 1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen- sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper op- eration.

The indicator light 2 will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operat- ing.

To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the O button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature, press the | button. The indicator light will turn on.

For information on HomeLink Universal Transceiver operation, refer to the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

WPD0126 LPD0469

MIRRORS

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your ve- hicle and cause an accident.

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the in- side mirror or glance over your shoul- der to properly judge distances to other objects.

The outside mirror remote control only op- erates when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch 1 to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de- sired position using the large switch 2 . Move the small switch 1 to the center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.

Manual folding outside mirrors Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis- ibility. For additional information, refer to Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

LPD2452 LPD2084

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

The automatic drive positioner system has three features:

Memory storage function (Key-link)

Memory storage function (Switch)

Entry/exit function

Key-link, when enabled, automatically re- tains the drivers last seat and outside mir- ror (if so equipped) position for that specific key when the ignition is turned from ON to OFF.

Each memory switch button (1 or 2) on the drivers door can also store one additional position which is independent of the key- linked position. MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Use the following process to setup key-link:

1. Unlock the vehicle with the desired In- telligent Key while the ignition is OFF.

2. Place the ignition in the ON position.

3. Within the Settings menu of the ve- hicle information display, select Key- Linked Settings and press the OK but- ton on the steering switch.

4. While in the menu, press the OK button on the steering switch to turn the sys- tem ON/OFF.

Once step 4 is completed, every time the ignition is switched from ON to OFF, the memory positions of the drivers seat and outside mirror (if so equipped) are linked to the Intelligent Key.

Follow the same procedure if you want to link the 2nd, 3rd or 4th Intelligent Key.

NOTE:

If new memory positions are set prior to turning the ignition from ON to OFF, the previously linked memory positions for the respective key will be overwritten by new positions.

Recalling Intelligent Key memory positions If the Key-Linked Settings are enabled in the vehicle information display for that par- ticular key, every time you enter the vehicle the drivers seat and outside mirrors (if so equipped) will automatically move to the drivers last position of the respective Intel- ligent Key.

NOTE:

The key-linked memory positions can be different from the positions stored in the memory switch (1 or 2).

LPD2432

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION (switch) Use the following process to manually store the two memory positions in the switch:

1. The vehicle should be stopped while setting the memory.

2. Adjust the drivers seat and outside mirror (if so equipped) to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional infor- mation, refer to Seats in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- straint system and Outside mirrors section of this manual.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec- onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for ap- proximately 5 seconds. The chime will sound when the memory is stored.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory position will be overwritten by the new stored position.

Recalling switch memory positions To recall the manually stored positions, press the memory switch (1 or 2). The driv- ers seat and outside mirror (if so equipped) will move to the positions stored to those buttons.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION This system is designed so that the drivers seat will automatically move when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to easily get in and out of the drivers seat.

The drivers seat will slide backward:

When the drivers door is opened and the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to OFF with the drivers door open.

The drivers seat will return to the previous position:

When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or canceled through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle information display by perform- ing the following:

Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.

LPD2872

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

Restarting the entry/exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the stored memory positions may be lost and some of the functions will be restricted.

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).

OR

2. Open and close the drivers door more than two times with the ignition switch in the OFF position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:

When the vehicle speed is above 4 mph (7 km/h).

When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive posi- tioner is operating.

When the switch for the drivers seat is pushed while the automatic drive posi- tioner is operating.

When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position.

When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.

When the shift lever is moved from P (Park) to any other position.

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect Owners Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Difference between predicted and actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 How to turn on and off predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . 4-9 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11

Intelligent Around View Monitor system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Difference between predicted and actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Intelligent Around View Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-26 MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Heater and air conditioner (manual) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40 USB/iPod charging port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41

Refer to the NissanConnect Owners Manual that includes the following infor- mation.

NissanConnect Services (if so equipped)

Navigation system (if so equipped)

Audio system

Apple CarPlay

Android AutoTM

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone system

Viewing information

Other settings

Voice recognition

General system information

NISSANCONNECT OWNERS MANUAL

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button LHA4800

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear- View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.

RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

The distance guide lines and the ve- hicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati- cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni- tor system uses a camera located just above the vehicles license plate 1 .

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA4801

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with refer- ence to the vehicle body line A are dis- played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

Red line 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

Yellow line 2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)

Green line 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 4

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines 5

Indicate the predicted course when back- ing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their loca- tions on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- ally located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

LHA4805

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines A do not touch the object in the display. However, the ve- hicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA5178 LHA4944 LHA4995

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up behind a projecting object The position C is shown farther than the position B in the display. However, the po- sition C is actually at the same distance as the position A . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position A if the object projects over the actual back- ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the ac- tual course line.

If the battery is disconnected or be- comes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incor- rectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.

Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC po- sition, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen A when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA5179 LHA5043

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the pre- dicted course lines B enter the park- ing space C .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines D parallel to the parking space C while referring to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. Press the CAMERA button.

2. Touch the Display Settings key.

3. Touch the Brightness, Contrast, Tint, Color, or Black Level key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the + or key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the ve- hicle is moving.

LHA4770

LHA3522

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTED COURSE LINES To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position:

1. Press the CAMERA button.

2. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to turn the feature ON or OFF.

To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course lines while in the R (Reverse) position, press the CAMERA button.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

The system cannot completely elimi- nate blind spots and may not show every object.

Underneath the bumper and the cor- ner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor be- cause of its monitoring range limita- tion. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

Objects viewed in the RearView Moni- tor differ from actual distance be- cause a wide-angle lens is used.

Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and out- side mirrors.

Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, ve- hicle position, road conditions and road grade.

Make sure that the trunk is securely closed when backing up.

Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is in- stalled above the license plate.

When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- sion instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage result- ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:

When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.

When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong re- flected light from the bumper.

The screen may flicker under fluores- cent light.

The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.

There may be a delay when switching between views.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the cam- era.

Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.

Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera 1 , the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip- ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA4801

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button LHA4800

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for the proper use of the In- telligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death

The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle opera- tion because it has areas where ob- jects cannot be viewed. The four cor- ners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the birds-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surround- ings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.

The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.

CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys- tem is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen for- mat. Not all views are available at all times.

Available views:

Front View An approximately 150degree view of the front of the vehicle.

Rear View An approximately 150degree view of the rear of the vehicle.

Birds-Eye View The surrounding views of the vehicle from above.

Front-Side View The view around and ahead of the front passengers side wheel.

Full Screen Rear View The view to the rear of the vehicle (which is a little wider than the standard Rear View).

To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around View Monitor system uses cam- eras located in the front grille, on the vehi- cles outside mirrors and one just above the vehicles license plate 1 .

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po- sition or press the CAMERA button to oper- ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

LHA4802

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor will automatically re- turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pressed with the shift lever in a position other than the R (Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING The distance guide lines and the ve-

hicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Use the displayed lines and the birds- eye view as a reference. The lines and the birds-eye view are greatly af- fected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.

If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the birds-eye view may be dis- played incorrectly.

When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob- jects viewed in the monitor are fur- ther than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.

Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.

Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.

On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the ac- tual course line.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.

Front and rear view

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with reference to the vehicle body line A are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body: Red line 1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) Yellow line 2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) Green line 3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)

Green line 4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) (if so equipped)

Front view SAA1840

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Vehicle width guide lines 5 :

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines 6 :

Indicate the predicted course when oper- ating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight- ahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines 6 are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

Birds-eye view

The birds-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.

The vehicle icon 1 shows the position of the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis- tance between objects viewed in the birds- eye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover 2 are indicated in black.

Rear view LHA4992

Front view LHA4534

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The non-viewable area 2 is highlighted in yellow for several seconds after the birds- eye view is displayed. It will be shown only the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

In addition, the non-viewable corners are displayed in red and blink for the first 3 sec- onds 3 to remind the driver to be cau- tious.

Predicted course lines 4 indicate the pre- dicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steer- ing wheel is turned and will not be dis- played while the steering wheel is in the neutral position.

When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 de- grees or less from the neutral position, the two green predicted course lines are shown in front of the vehicle.

When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, one green predicted course line is shown in front of the vehicle and the other predicted course line is shown at the side of the vehicle.

When the monitor displays the rear view, the predicted course lines are shown at the back of the vehicle.

WARNING Objects in the birds-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.

Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.

The view of the birds-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters.

A line on the ground may be mis- aligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

Rear view LHA4535

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 1 shows the front part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 2 shows the ap- proximate vehicle width including the out- side mirrors.

The extensions 3 of both the front 1 and side 2 lines are shown with a green dotted line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their loca- tions on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actu- ally located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA2652

LHA5178

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines A do not touch the object in the display. However, the ve- hicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA4944 LHA4995

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Backing up behind a projecting object The position C is shown farther than the position B in the display. However, the po- sition C is actually at the same distance as the position A . The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position A if the object projects over the actual back- ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the ac- tual course line.

If the battery is disconnected or be- comes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incor- rectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.

Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC po- sition, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen A when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA5179 LHA5043

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the pre- dicted course lines B enter the park- ing space C .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines D parallel to the parking space C while referring to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.

The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis- plays different split screen views depend- ing on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are:

Rear view/birds-eye view split screen

Rear view/front-side view split screen

Full screen rear view

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) position, the available views are:

Front view/birds-eye view split screen

Front view/front-side view split screen

The display will switch from the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen when:

The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

A different screen is selected.

LHA4770

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on the main menu screen, touch

the Settings key.

2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Display Settings key.

4. Touch the Brightness, Contrast, Tint, Color, or Black Level key.

5. Adjust the item by touching the + or key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings of the Intelligent Around View Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LHA3522

LHA4808

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for Intelligent Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accor- dance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

Do not use the Intelligent Around View Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the trunk is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelli- gent Around View Monitor.

The apparent distance between ob- jects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance.

The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put any- thing such as a license plate frame on the vehicle that covers or blocks the view of the cameras.

When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, wa- ter may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be viewed 1 . When in the birds-eye view, a tall object near the seam 2 of the camera viewing areas will not appear in the moni- tor.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:

There may be a delay when switching between views.

When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.

When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

The screen may flicker under fluores- cent light.

The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ some- what from the actual color of objects.

Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark envi- ronment.

There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the birds-eye view.

Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

System temporarily unavailable When the ! icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Intel- ligent Around View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the [X] icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiv- ing temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hin- der normal driving operation but the sys- tem should be inspected if it occurs fre- quently. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.

Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras 1 , the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA4802

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button LHA4800

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection (MOD) system could result in serious injury or death

The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with ob- jects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.

The system is deactivated at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

When the CAMERA button is pressed to activate the camera view on the display.

When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is dis- played:

When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects mov- ing objects in the birds-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the out- side mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.

Front and birds-eye views LHA4190

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view.

When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not operate if the trunk is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view.

When the MOD system detects moving ob- jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard when in front or rear view and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving ob- jects, the yellow frame continues to be dis- played.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is beeping, the MOD system does not chime.

In the birds-eye view, the yellow frame 1 is displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where mov- ing objects are detected. The yellow frame 2 is displayed on each view in the front view and rear view modes. A blue MOD icon 3 is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative.

Rear and birds-eye views LHA5171

Rear and front-side views LHA4997

Full screen rear view LHA4998

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon 3 is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so equipped) Some vehicles include the option to allow the MOD system to be turned on or off.

To turn the MOD system on or off:

1. Touch the Setting key.

2. Touch the Camera key.

3. Touch the Moving Object Detection key to switch between ON or OFF.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limita- tions could result in serious injury or death.

Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.

Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle win- dow) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:

When there is low contrast be- tween background and the moving objects.

When there is a blinking source of light.

When strong light such as another vehicles headlight or sunlight is present.

When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.

When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.

When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.

The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, mov- ing shadows, etc.

The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, di- rection, distance or shape of the mov- ing objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.

When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not dis- play objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.

NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to orange if one of the following has occurred:

When the system is malfunctioning.

When the component temperature reaches a high level (icon will blink).

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the RearView camera has de- tected a blockage (icon will blink).

If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.

Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras 1 , the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wip- ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA4802

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent slides.

Open or close the vents by using the slide. Move the slide toward the to open the vents or toward the to close them.

Side LHA4940

Center LHA4939

Rear (if so equipped) LHA1134

VENTS

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Fan speed control dial 2. Heated seat switches (if so

equipped) 3. Front defroster button

4. Rear window and outside mir- ror (if so equipped) defroster switch

5. Air recirculation button 6. MAX A/C / temperature control dial 7. Air flow control buttons

8. A/C (air conditioner) button

WARNING The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assis- tance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the inte- rior air to become stale and the win- dows to fog up.

NOTE:

Odors from inside and outside the ve- hicle can build up in the air condi- tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas- senger compartment through the vents.

LHA4783

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air re- circulation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS Fan speed control dial

The fan speed control dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets.

Air flows from center and side vents.

Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Turn the dial to the MAX A/C position for maximum cooling. Air will flow from center and side vents.

Air recirculation button On position (Indicator light on): Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the on position when:

driving on a dusty road.

to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.

for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.

Off position (Indicator light off): Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation.

A/C (air conditioner) button Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position and

press the button to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again. The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch For additional information, refer to Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) For additional information, refer to Heated seat switches in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION Heating This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets and the side vent out- lets.

1. Press the button to the off posi- tion for normal heating.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

Ventilation This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents.

1. Press the button to the off posi- tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .

2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan speed con- trol dial to the highest setting and the temperature control to the full HOT po- sition.

When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36F (2C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further im- prove the defogging performance. The recirculation mode cannot be activated in the position.

Bi-level heating The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front and rear floor outlets.

1. Press the button to the off posi- tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.

When the position is selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36F (2C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further im- prove the defogging performance.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION Start the engine, turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position, and press the button to activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation. The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the off posi- tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Press the A/C button. The indicator light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

For quick cooling when the outside temperature is high, press the button to the ON position. Be sure to return the to the off position for normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the button to the off posi- tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

4. Press the A/C (air conditioner) button. The indicator light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position.

When the or are selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36F (2C). This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further im- prove the defogging performance.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.

After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3 minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger com- partment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps pre- vent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem- perature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional in- formation, refer to If your vehicle over- heats in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

When Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) is activated, the manual cli- mate control system will default to the last used heating or cooling mode.

AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation button should always be in the off position for heating and defrost- ing.

LHA4786

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

LHA4787 LHA4788

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4789 LHA4790

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

1. AUTO (automatic) climate control button / temperature control dial (drivers side)

2. Display screen 3. Heated seat switches

4. SYNC button / temperature control dial (passengers side)

5. A/C (air conditioner) button 6. Air recirculation button 7. Air flow control button 8. Fan speed control buttons

9. Heated steering wheel switch 10. Rear window and outside mir-

ror defroster switch 11. Front defroster button 12. ON-OFF button

WARNING The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assis- tance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the inte- rior air to become stale and the win- dows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

LHA4784

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Odors from inside and outside the ve- hicle can build up in the air condi- tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas- senger compartment through the vents.

When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air re- circulation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO) This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution, air intake control, and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired tem- perature.

Adjust the temperature display to about 75F (24C) for normal operation.

The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained auto- matically. Air flow distribution, air intake control and fan speed are also con- trolled automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

3. You can individually set drivers and front passengers side temperature us- ing each temperature control dial. To synchronize the drivers and front pas- sengers temperature settings, press the SYNC button.

Heating (A/C OFF) The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained auto- matically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.

Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the front defroster button on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.

To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed control buttons to set the fan speed to maximum.

As soon as possible after the wind- shield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

When the front defroster button is pressed, the air conditioner will auto- matically be turned on at outside tem- peratures above 36F (2C). The air recir- culate mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further im- prove the defogging performance.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped) Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is acti- vated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the cli- mate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost- ing mode, the rear window defroster and heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control buttons Press the fan speed control buttons to manually control the fan speed. Press the AUTO button to return to auto- matic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right. Temperature can be ad- justed on the drivers and passengers side.

Air recirculation Press the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the button will come on. The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode. When the outside temperature exceeds 70F (21C), the air conditioning system may default to air recirculation mode automati- cally to reduce overall power consumption. To exit air recirculation mode, deselect the air recirculation button (indicator light will turn off) to enter fresh air mode.

Automatic intake air control In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually con- trol the intake air, press the air recir- culation button. To return to the automatic control mode, press and hold the air recirculation button for about 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automati- cally.

A/C (air conditioner) button

Start the engine, press the fan speed control buttons to the desired position and press the button to turn on the air conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press the button again. The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Pressing the button manually con- trols air flow and selects the air outlet:

Air flows from center and side vents.

Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

Synchronize climate settings Press the SYNC button to synchronize cli- mate settings. The sync indicator will turn on.

Pressing SYNC will synchronize drivers and front passengers climate settings.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To change climate settings when SYNC is active (the SYNC indicator is on):

The drivers side temperature control dial will control the driver and front pas- senger temperatures.

The fan speed control dial will control the fan speeds.

To exit SYNC:

To remove the front passenger from SYNC, turn the passengers side tem- perature control dial.

Pressing SYNC multiple times will re- activate SYNC.

To turn system off Press the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch For additional information, refer to Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

Heated seat switches For additional information, refer to Heated seat switches in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

Heated steering wheel switch For additional information, refer to Heated steering wheel switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS The sunload sensor, located on the top center of the instrument panel, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sen- sor.

LHA4943

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

When the climate system is in auto- matic operation and the engine coolant temperature and outside air tempera- ture are low, the air flow outlet may de- fault to defroster mode for a maximum of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a malfunction. After the engine coolant temperature warms up, the air flow out- let will return to foot mode and opera- tion will continue normally.

When the outside and interior cabin temperatures are moderate to high, the intake setting may default to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. You may no- tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level mode, or side demist vent outlets for a maximum of 15 seconds. This may oc- cur when the previous climate setting was turned off. This is not a malfunction. After the initial warm air is expelled, the intake will return to automatic control, the air flow outlet will return to previous settings, and operation will continue normally. To exit, press any climate con- trol button.

Keep the moonroof (if so equipped) closed while the air conditioner is in op- eration.

If you feel that the air flow mode you have selected and the outlets the air is coming out do not match, select the mode.

When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the foot out- lets for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de- signed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant does not harm the earths ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to Air conditioner sys- tem refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer informa- tion section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your environmentally friendly air conditioner system.

WARNING The air conditioner system contains re- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser- vice should be done only by an experi- enced technician with proper equipment.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

There is a USB/iPod charging port located on the rear center console. This port will charge compatible devices.

NOTE:

Only the USB connection port located below the instrument panel will allow operation of the USB/iPod devices through the audio system.

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor recep- tion or noise

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

WARNING A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle op- eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.

If you must make a call while your ve- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- lar phone operational mode is highly recommended. Exercise extreme cau- tion at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full atten- tion to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

LHA4803

USB/iPod CHARGING PORT ANTENNA CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

CAUTION Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic con- trol system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.

Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.

For additional information, it is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . 5-14 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Pedal type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Switch type (models with electronic parking brake system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Automatic brake hold (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 How to activate/deactivate the automatic brake hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 How to use the automatic brake hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) (if so equipped) . . . 5-30 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Turning the Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

LDW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 How to enable/disable the LDW system . . . . . 5-35 LDW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

I-LI system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 How to enable/disable the I-LI system. . . . . . .5-40 I-LI system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-44 BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-47 BSW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-54 RCTA system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61

Cruise control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 5-65

How to select the cruise control mode . . . . . . 5-67 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-85

ProPILOT Assist (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-89 ProPILOT Assist system operation . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91 Turning the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94 Operating ProPILOT Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95 How to enable/disable the Steering Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101 Steering Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120

Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124

RAB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125 Turning the RAB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126 RAB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-129

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130

AEB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131 Turning the AEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133 AEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-138

AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139

Turning the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141 AEB with Pedestrian Detection system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW). . . 5-148 I-FCW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150 Turning the I-FCW system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151 I-FCW system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159

Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160 Intelligent Driver Alertness system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160 How to enable/disable the Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-163 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-164

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 5-164 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-167 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-168 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-169 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-170

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . .5-171 Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-173

Chassis Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174 Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174

Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-174 Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . 5-175

System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-176 How to enable/disable the sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-178

Sonar limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-179 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-180 Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-181 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-182

Active noise cancellation/Active sound enhancement (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-183

Active noise cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-183 Active sound enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-183

WARNING Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis- tance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan- gerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the ve- hicle inspected immediately.

Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

Do not park the vehicle with the en- gine running for any extended length of time.

Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise ex- haust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but- ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

If electrical wiring or other cable con- nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturers rec- ommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission con- trol device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani- mals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re- duce the three-way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if no- ticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are de- tected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damag- ing the three-way catalyst.

Do not race the engine while warming it up.

Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under- inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as pos- sible, and inflate them to the proper pres- sure. Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi- tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain cor- rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi- nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- bined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illu- minated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunc- tion indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- ing the installation of replacement or alter- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Starting and driving 5-5

Additional information:

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pres- sure (for example, a flat tire while driv- ing).

The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted on all four tires. Af- ter all four tires are inflated to the rec- ommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warn- ing appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warn- ing appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

The Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warn- ing does not appear if the low tire pres- sure warning light illuminates to indi- cate a TPMS malfunction.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicles op- eration and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illumi- nates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.

The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the drivers door opening.

You can also check the tire pressure of all tires (except the spare) on the vehicle information display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position.

For additional information, refer to Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section, Tire Pressure Moni- toring System (TPMS) in the In case of emergency section and Tire pressure in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ- ences before use.

5-6 Starting and driving

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sud- den steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- ing with underinflated tires may per- manently damage the tires and in- crease the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label to turn the low tire pres- sure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (For additional informa- tion, refer to Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire.)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indi- cated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pres- sure sensors.

CAUTION Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win- dows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sen- sors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem- porarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

Facilities or electric devices using simi- lar radio frequencies are near the ve- hicle.

If a transmitter set to similar frequen- cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:

If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.

If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.

If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-7

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides

visual and audible signals outside the ve- hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec- ommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- sition. Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pres- sure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the des- ignated pressure, the horn beeps once.

If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds af- ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi- cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

The TPMS will not activate the Easy- Fill Tire Alert under the following con- ditions:

If there is interference from an exter- nal device or transmitter.

The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.

There is a malfunction in the TPMS.

There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators.

The identification code of the tire pressure sensor is not registered to the system.

The battery of the tire pressure sen- sor is low.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op- erate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

5-8 Starting and driving

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the in- fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- scription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- tem section of this manual, and also in- struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure be- low. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires re- turn to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the ve- hicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.

If you decide that it is not safe to re- turn the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic con- ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow-out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han- dling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses

Starting and driving 5-9

air pressure or blows-out while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The ve- hicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- sure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury.

The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire.

Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal.

Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For addi- tional information, refer to Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING Never drive under the influence of alco- hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an acci- dent injuring yourself and others. Addi- tionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- ever, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif- ferently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Dont drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

5-10 Starting and driving

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that 2-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod- els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING Spinning the front wheels on slippery

surfaces may cause the AWD warning message to display and the AWD sys- tem to automatically switch from the AWD to the 2WD mode. This could re- duce the traction. Be especially care- ful when towing a trailer (AWD models).

Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain.

Do not drive across steep slopes. In- stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road ve- hicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward.

Many hills are too steep for any ve- hicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over.

Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a drop- off or other hazard that could cause an accident.

If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never attempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in R (Reverse) gear and apply brakes to control your speed.

Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed.

Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough ter- rain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause in- jury to you or your passengers.

Exceeding the roof rack capacity can raise the center of gravity excessively and affect the handling and stability of the vehicle.

Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over.

Starting and driving 5-11

Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move sud- denly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.

Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened.

Always drive with the floor mats in place as the floor may become hot.

Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher cen- ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af- fected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.

Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with AWD engaged.

For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at- tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna- mometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test fa- cility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drive- train damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in seri- ous vehicle damage or personal injury.

When a wheel is off the ground due to an unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively.

Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your NISSAN vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a pas- senger car. The vehicle is not de- signed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars.

Failure to operate this vehicle cor- rectly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident.

Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias- belted, or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the front wheels when driving on slip- pery roads and drive carefully.

Be sure to check the brakes immedi- ately after driving in mud or water. For additional information, refer to Brake precautions in this section.

Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured.

Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent mainte- nance may be required. For additional information, refer to Maintenance under severe operating conditions in the Maintenance and schedules sec- tion of this manual.

5-12 Starting and driving

WARNING Do not operate the push-button igni- tion switch while driving the vehicle ex- cept in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick suc- cession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate.

Push the ignition switch center:

Once to change to ON.

Two times to change to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically re- turn to the LOCK position when any door is either opened or closed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be placed in the OFF position until the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be placed in the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera- tion are displayed on the vehicle informa- tion display. For additional information, re- fer to Vehicle information display in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

LSD2645

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-13

OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are pres- ent near the operating location, the Intelli- gent Key systems operating range be- comes narrower and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even some- one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.

The operating range of the engine start function is inside of the vehicle 1 .

The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.

If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel or inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the In- telligent Key may not function.

If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ON position while carrying the Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF posi- tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions:

All doors are closed.

The shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of the following occur:

Any door is opened.

The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.

The ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION Do not leave the vehicle with the igni- tion switch in the ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

LSD2089

5-14 Starting and driving

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

AUTO ACC

With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelligent Key with you and the ignition switch placed from the ON position to the OFF position, the radio can still be used for a period of time, or until the drivers door is opened.

After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth Hands- Free Phone System may be restarted by pressing the POWER button/VOLUME con- trol knob or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, refer to the sepa- rate NissanConnect Owners Manual.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the follow- ing procedure:

Rapidly push the ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec- onds, or

Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi- tion.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel- ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

SSD0860

Starting and driving 5-15

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without de- pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to the ON position.

4. Push the ignition switch while depress- ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.

NOTE:

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge in- dicator appears in the vehicle infor- mation display even when the Intelli- gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the In- telligent Key battery discharge indi- cator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.

If the Intelligent Key battery dis- charge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For addi- tional information, refer to Battery replacement in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an auto- mated toll road device or automatic pay- ment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the in- terference) separate from the regis- tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield- washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

Check that all windows and lights are clean.

Visually inspect tires for their appear- ance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

Lock all doors.

Position seat and adjust headrests/head restraints.

Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- gers to do likewise.

Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. For additional informa- tion, refer to Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders in the In- struments and controls section of this manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-16 Starting and driving

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to oper- ate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po- sition. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.

If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when re- starting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the en- gine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

If the engine is very hard to start be- cause it is flooded, depress the accel- erator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. After cranking the engine, release the ac- celerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above pro- cedure.

CAUTION Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up:

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery dis- charge and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec- tronic accessories that consume bat- tery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE ENGINE START Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi- tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-17

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.

For additional information, refer to NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), L (Low) or manual shift mode (if so equipped). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is re- versing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

CAUTION Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv- ing. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause se- rious damage to the transmission.

To avoid possible damage to your ve- hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.

Follow these procedures for maximum ve- hicle performance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re- duced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-18 Starting and driving

1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when shaded and Intelligent Lane Interven- tion (I-LI) when solid

3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

Starting the vehicle 1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. The Continuously Variable Transmis- sion is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive po- sition while the ignition switch is in the ON position.The shift lever can- not be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK position.

2. A screen is displayed for a period of time that indicates the status of the driving aid functions (if so equipped).

AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled when the specified driving aid is shaded.

I-LI is enabled when the driving aid is solid.

Use the 1 or 2 button to navigate the settings screen. For additional information, refer to How to use the vehicle information dis- play in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

3. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever to a driving position.

4. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

5. Stop the vehicle completely before moving the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

LSD3073 LSD3074

Starting and driving 5-19

WARNING Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), L (Low) or manual shift mode (if so equipped). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is re- versing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

CAUTION Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv- ing. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause se- rious damage to the transmission.

To avoid possible damage to your ve- hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

To move the shift lever:

Press the button A while depress- ing the brake pedal

Press the button A to shift

Shift without pressing the button A

Shifting After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

LSD2643

5-20 Starting and driving

WARNING Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal in- jury or property damage.

P (Park)

CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal should be de- pressed to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be de- pressed to move the shift lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- gaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low)

Use this position for engine braking on steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in any other circumstances.

Starting and driving 5-21

Manual shift mode (if so equipped) When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi- tion and the drive sport mode switch is pushed, the transmission is ready for the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by pulling the right-side or left-side paddle shifter.

When shifting up, pull the right side paddle shifter (+) B . The transmission shifts to the higher range.

When shifting down, pull the left side paddle shifter () A . The transmission shifts to the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode, push the drive sport mode switch. The transmission returns to the normal driving mode. When you pull the paddle shifter while in the D (Drive) position with the drive sport mode switch pushed, the transmis- sion will shift to the upper or lower range temporarily. The transmission will auto- matically return to the drive sport mode after a short period of time. If you want to return to the drive sport mode manually, pull and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5 seconds.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

M8 (8th) and M7 (7th)

Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.

M6 (6th) and M5 (5th)

Use this position when driving up long slopes or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades.

M1 (1st)

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak- ing on steep downhill grades.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than the 8th range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up

Use the + (up) side paddle shifter. (Shifts to higher range.)

When shifting down

Use the (down) side paddle shifter. (Shifts to lower range.)

When canceling the manual shift mode

To cancel manual shift mode, push the drive sport mode switch on the shift lever or press and hold either paddle shifter.

LSD2914

5-22 Starting and driving

In the manual shift mode, the trans- mission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving per- formance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.

In the manual shift mode, the trans- mission may shift up automatically to a higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the trans- mission automatically shifts down and shifts to 1st gear before the ve- hicle comes to a stop.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) operation is limited to automatic drive mode when CVT fluid tempera- ture is extremely low even if manual shift mode is selected. This is not a mal- function. When CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be selected.

When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the shift range may upshift in lower rpm than usual. This is not a malfunc- tion.

Shift lock release If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pressed.

It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged. For additional infor- mation, refer to Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual. Contact a NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.

To move the shift lever, complete the fol- lowing procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover.

If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used.

4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock release slot and push down.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have the transmission checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is de- pressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

LSD2644

Starting and driving 5-23

Drive sport mode switch When the drive sport mode switch is pushed with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position, the drive sport mode indicator in the instrument panel illuminates. For addi- tional information, refer to Drive sport mode indicator in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

Use the drive sport mode when you need improved engine braking.

To turn off the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch again. The drive sport mode indicator will turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the drive sport mode will automatically turn off.

Accelerator downshift in D (Drive) position For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode This transmission has a high fluid tem- perature protection mode. If the fluid tem- perature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high tem- peratures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be de- creased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelera- tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.

Fail-safe If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional infor- mation, refer to Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual. This will oc- cur even if all electrical circuits are func- tioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch back to the ON position. The ve- hicle should return to its normal operat- ing condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Drive sport mode LSD3250

5-24 Starting and driving

WARNING When the high fluid temperature pro- tection mode or fail-safe operation oc- curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re- duced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

WARNING Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.

Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unat- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- hicle on a warm day can quickly be- come high enough to cause a signifi- cant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

PEDAL TYPE To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- sition.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn- ing light goes out.

LSD0158

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-25

SWITCH TYPE (models with electronic parking brake system) The electronic parking brake can be ap- plied or released automatically or by oper- ating the parking brake switch.

Automatic operation The electronic parking brake will apply au- tomatically if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function.

The electronic parking brake is automati- cally released as soon as the vehicle starts and the accelerator pedal is depressed with the drivers seat belt fastened.

WARNING Before leaving the vehicle, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and check that the electronic parking brake warning light is illuminated to confirm that the electronic parking brake is ap- plied. The electronic parking brake warning light will remain on for a period of time after the drivers door is locked.

CAUTION When parking in an area where the out- side temperature is below 32F (0C), the parking brake, if applied, may freeze in place and may be difficult to release.

For safe parking, it is recommended that you place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and securely block the wheels.

NOTE:

To keep the electronic parking brake released after the engine is turned off, place the ignition switch in the OFF position, depress the brake pedal and push down the parking brake switch before opening the drivers door.

If a malfunction occurs in the elec- tronic parking brake system (for ex- ample, due to battery discharge), it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

If the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will apply automatically.

If the drivers seat belt is unfastened when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will ap- ply automatically.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will apply automatically.

LSD3210

5-26 Starting and driving

Manual operation The electronic parking brake will not be au- tomatically applied if the engine is stopped without using the ignition switch (for ex- ample, by engine stalling). In such a case, you have to apply the parking brake manu- ally.

To apply: Pull the switch up 1 . The indica- tor light A will illuminate.

To release: With the ignition switch in the ON position, depress the brake pedal and push the switch down 2 . The indicator light A will turn off.

Before driving, check that the electronic parking brake indicator light ( or PARK) goes out. For additional information, refer to Warning lights, indicator lights and au- dible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

NOTE:

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven without releasing the parking brake. For additional information, re- fer to Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

While the electronic parking brake is applied or released, an operating sound is heard from the lower side of the rear seat. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

When the electronic parking brake is frequently applied and released in a short period of time, the parking brake may not operate in order to prevent the parking brake system from overheating. If this occurs, oper- ate the electronic parking brake switch again after waiting approxi- mately 1 minute.

If the electronic parking brake must be applied while driving in an emer- gency, pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you release the parking brake switch, the parking brake will be released.

While pulling up the electronic park- ing brake switch during driving, the parking brake is applied and a chime sounds. The electronic parking brake indicator light in the meter and in the parking brake switch illuminates. This does not indicate a malfunction. The electronic parking brake indica- tor light in the meter and in the park- ing brake switch turns off when the parking brake is released.

When pulling the electronic parking brake switch up with the ignition switch in the OFF or AUTO ACC posi- tion, the parking brake switch indica- tor light will continue to illuminate for a short period of time.

Starting and driving 5-27

The automatic brake hold function main- tains the braking force without the driver having to depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped at a traffic light or intersection. As soon as the driver de- presses the accelerator pedal again, the automatic brake hold function is deacti- vated and the braking force is released. The operating status of the automatic brake hold can be displayed on the vehicle infor- mation display.

WARNING The automatic brake hold function is

not designed to hold the vehicle on a steep hill or slippery road. Never use the automatic brake hold when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or slippery road. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move.

When the automatic brake hold func- tion is activated but fails to maintain the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the vehicle unexpectedly moves due to outside conditions, the chime may sound and automatic brake hold warning may illuminate in the vehicle information display.

Be sure to deactivate the automatic brake hold function when using a car wash or towing your vehicle.

Make sure to place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake when parking your ve- hicle or loading luggage. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

If any of the following conditions oc- cur, the automatic brake hold function may not function. Have the system checked promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these conditions could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in seri- ous personal injury or property damage.

A warning message appears in the vehicle information display.

The indicator light on the auto- matic brake hold switch does not illuminate when the switch is pushed.

The automatic brake hold function will not be activated if the Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light, electronic parking brake warn- ing light or master warning light illu- minate and the chassis control sys- tem fault message appears in the vehicle information display.

To maintain the braking force to keep the vehicle to a standstill, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD (if so equipped)

5-28 Starting and driving

HOW TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION For additional information on activating and deactivating the automatic brake hold function, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

How to activate the automatic brake hold function

1. With the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion, push the automatic brake hold switch 1 . The indicator light on the au- tomatic brake hold switch 2 illuminates.

2. When the automatic brake hold func- tion goes into standby, the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illumi- nates.

To use the automatic brake hold function, the following conditions need to be met:

The drivers seat belt is fastened.

The electronic parking brake is re- leased.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) posi- tion.

The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill.

NOTE:

The automatic brake hold function re- sets to OFF every time the ignition switch is switched from the OFF position to the ON position.

How to deactivate the automatic brake hold function While the automatic brake hold function is activated, push the automatic brake hold switch to turn off the automatic brake hold indicator light and deactivate the auto- matic brake hold function. To deactivate the automatic brake hold function while

the brake force has been maintained by the automatic brake hold function, depress the brake pedal and push the automatic brake hold switch.

WARNING Make sure to firmly depress and hold the brake pedal when turning off the automatic brake hold function while the brake force is applied. When the au- tomatic brake hold function is deacti- vated, the brake force will be released. This could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly. Failure to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling may result in serious personal injury or property damage.

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION For additional information on using the au- tomatic brake hold function, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

To maintain braking force automatically With the automatic brake hold function ac- tivated and the automatic brake hold indi- cator light (white) illuminated on the meter, depress the braking pedal to stop the ve-

LSD3211

Starting and driving 5-29

hicle. The brake force is automatically maintained without your foot depressed on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is maintained, the automatic brake hold indi- cator light (green) illuminates on the meter.

To start the vehicle from a standstill With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position, depress the accelerator pedal while the brake force is maintained. The brake force will automatically be re- leased to restart the vehicle.

The automatic brake hold indicator light (white) on the meter illuminates and the automatic brake hold returns to standby.

Parking When the shift lever is in the P (Park) posi- tion with the brake force maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released. The automatic brake hold in- dicator light turns off. When the parking brake is applied with the brake force main- tained by the automatic brake hold func- tion, the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released. The automatic brake hold indicator light turns off.

NOTE:

Under the following conditions, the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the au- tomatic brake hold will be released:

The braking force is applied by the automatic brake hold function for 3 minutes or longer.

The drivers seat belt is unfas- tened.

The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

If a malfunction occurs in the au- tomatic brake hold function.

When the vehicle stops, but the brake force is not automatically applied, de- press the brake pedal firmly until the automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates.

The TSR system provides the driver with information about the most recently de- tected speed limit. The system captures the road sign information with the multi- sensing front camera unit 1 located on the windshield in front of the inside rear- view mirror and displays the detected signs in the vehicle information display. For vehicles equipped with a navigation sys- tem, the speed limit displayed is based on a combination of navigation system data and live camera recognition. TSR informa- tion is always displayed at the top of the vehicle information display, and optionally in the main central area of the display screen.

LSD3212

TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) (if so equipped)

5-30 Starting and driving

WARNING The TSR system is only intended to be a support device to provide the driver with information. It is not a replacement for the drivers attention to traffic con- ditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to care- lessness. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert and drive safely at all times.

SYSTEM OPERATION The Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) system displays the following types of road signs:

A Speed sign detected (in Canada)

B Speed sign detected (in USA)

C Speed sign detected (no speed limit detected)

D Do not pass sign detected

CAUTION The TSR system is intended as an aid

to careful driving. It is the drivers re- sponsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and observe all road regulations that currently apply, including looking out for road signs.

LSD3330 LSD3378

Starting and driving 5-31

The TSR system may not function properly under the following conditions: When the road sign is not clearly

visible, for example, due to dam- age or weather conditions.

When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the multi- sensing camera unit.

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aim- ing is not adjusted properly.

When strong light enters the cam- era unit. (For example, the light di- rectly shines on the front of the ve- hicle at sunrise or sunset.)

When a sudden change in bright- ness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

In areas not covered by the naviga- tion system.

If there are deviations in relation to the navigation, for example due to changes in the road routing.

When overtaking buses or trucks with speed stickers.

TURNING THE TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION (TSR) SYSTEM ON AND OFF Perform the following steps to enable or disable the TSR system.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Speed Limit Sign and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104F [40C]) and then started, the TSR system may be deacti- vated automatically. The Unavailable: High Camera Temperature warning message will appear in the vehicle information dis- play.

Action to take:

When the interior temperature is reduced, the TSR system will resume operating au- tomatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the TSR system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically and the system Malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

If the TSR Malfunction message appears, pull of the road at a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the TSR Malfunction mes- sage continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3243

5-32 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The TSR system uses the same multi- sensing front camera unit that is used by the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system, located in front of the interior rearview mir- ror. For additional information, refer to Sys- tem maintenance in the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) section.

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.

This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential un- intended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve- hicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The LDW system will operate when the ve- hicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.

The LDW system monitors the lane mark- ers on the traveling lane using the camera unit A located above the inside mirror.

The LDW system warns the driver that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. For additional information, refer to LDW system operation in this section.

LSD3213

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-33

LDW SYSTEM OPERATION The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane mark- ings are clear. When the vehicle ap- proaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the instru- ment panel will blink to alert the driver.

The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD3291

5-34 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Lane and press the OK button.

3. Select Lane Departure Warning and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.

The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.

LSD3215

Starting and driving 5-35

Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.

When driving on winding or un- even roads.

When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.

When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.

When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).

When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or sus- pension parts.

When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.

The system may not function prop- erly under the following conditions:

On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane mark- ers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane mark- ers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

On roads where there are sharp curves.

On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shad- ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system could detect these items as lane markers.)

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

When the vehicles traveling direc- tion does not align with the lane marker.

When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.

When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aim- ing is not adjusted properly.

When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

When a sudden change in bright- ness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104F [40C]) and then started, the LDW system may be deacti- vated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle infor- mation display: Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature.

5-36 Starting and driving

When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating au- tomatically.

The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions:

When you operate the lane change sig- nal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approxi- mately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the LDW system malfunctions, it will can- cel automatically and Not Available Sys- tem Malfunction will appear in the vehicle information display. If Not Available Sys- tem Malfunction appears in the vehicle in- formation display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and the ignition switch in the OFF position and re- start the engine/motor. If Not Available System Malfunction continues to appear

in the vehicle information display, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The lane camera unit 1 for the LDW sys- tem is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW sys- tem and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the windshield clean.

Do not attach a sticker (including trans- parent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

LSD3484

Starting and driving 5-37

Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera units capability of detecting the lane mark- ers.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the cam- era unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the I-LI sys- tem could result in serious injury or death.

The I-LI system will not steer the ve- hicle or prevent loss of control. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The I-LI system is primarily intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers in certain road, weather, or driving conditions.

The I-LI system must be turned on with the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel, ev- ery time the ignition is placed in the ON position.

The I-LI system will operate when the ve- hicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.

The I-LI system warns the driver when the vehicle has left the center of the traveling lane with an indicator and a steering wheel vibration. The system helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time).

The I-LI system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera unit A located above the inside mirror.

LSD3213

INTELLIGENT LANE INTERVENTION (I-LI) (if so equipped)

5-38 Starting and driving

1 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) indica- tor

2 Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) indi- cator (if so equipped)

3 ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)

I-LI SYSTEM OPERATION The I-LI system operates above approxi- mately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI system will automati- cally apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.

To turn on the I-LI system, push the ProPI- LOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPI- LOT Assist) on the steering wheel after starting the engine/motor. The I-LI indica- tor on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch again to turn off the I-LI system. The I-LI indicator will turn off.

LSD3309

Starting and driving 5-39

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE I-LI SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the I-LI system.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Lane and press the OK button.

3. Select Lane Departure Prevention and press the OK button.

4. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

When Lane Departure Prevention is en- abled in the settings menu, turning the ProPILOT Assist system (if so equipped) on will activate the I-LI system at the same time. If Lane Departure Prevention is not enabled in the settings menu, I-LI will automatically activate when the Pro- PILOT Assist system is SET. For addi- tional information, refer to Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) in this section.

LSD3215

5-40 Starting and driving

I-LI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the I-LI system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the I-LI system could result in serious injury or death.

The I-LI system may activate if you change lanes without first activating your turn signal or, for example, if a construction zone directs traffic to cross an existing lane marker. If this occurs you may need to apply correc- tive steering to complete your lane change.

Because the I-LI may not activate un- der the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need to apply corrective steering.

When the I-LI system is operating, avoid excessive or sudden steering maneuvers. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle.

The I-LI system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.

Do not use the I-LI system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.

When driving on winding or un- even roads.

When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.

When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.

When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, non- standard wheels).

When the vehicle is equipped with nonoriginal brake parts or suspen- sion parts.

When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.

On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane mark- ers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane mark- ers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

On roads where there are sharp curves.

On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shad- ows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The I-LI system could detect these items as lane markers.)

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

Starting and driving 5-41

When the vehicles traveling direc- tion does not align with the lane marker.

When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.

When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aim- ing is not adjusted properly.

When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

When a sudden change in bright- ness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

While the I-LI system is operating, you may hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the I-LI system is operating properly.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A:

The warning and assist functions of the I-LI system are not designed to work under the following conditions:

When you operate the lane change sig- nal and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The I-LI sys- tem will be deactivated for approxi- mately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist func- tions will resume.

Condition B:

The assist function of the I-LI system is not designed to work under the following con- ditions (warning is still functional):

When the brake pedal is depressed.

When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes.

When the vehicle is accelerated during I-LI system operation.

When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) approach warning occurs.

When the hazard warning flashers are operated.

When driving on a curve at high speed.

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the I-LI system application of the brakes will resume.

Condition C:

If the following messages appear in the vehicle information display, the I-LI system will be turned off automatically.

Not Available Poor Road Conditions: When the VDC system (except Traction Control System [TCS] function) or ABS operates.

Currently not available: When the VDC system is turned off.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the I-LI system. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT

5-42 Starting and driving

Assist) on the steering wheel again to turn the I-LI system back on.

Temporary disabled status at high tem- perature:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104F [40C]) and then the I-LI system is turned on, the I-LI system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear on the ve- hicle information display: Unavailable: High Cabin Temperature. When the interior temperature is reduced, the system will re- sume operating automatically.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the I-LI system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The LDW indicator (orange) will illuminate in the display. If the LDW indi- cator (orange) illuminates in the display, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. Turn the engine/motor off and restart the engine/motor. If the LDW indica- tor (orange) continues to illuminate, have the I-LI system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The lane camera unit 1 for the I-LI system is located above the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the I-LI system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the windshield clean.

Do not attach a sticker (including trans- parent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera units capability of detecting the lane mark- ers.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the cam- era unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

LSD3484

Starting and driving 5-43

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.

The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direc- tion your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

The BSW system uses radar sensors 1 installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detec- tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec- tion zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

LSD3286 Detection zone

SSD1030

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

5-44 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION The BSW system operates above approxi- mately 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica- tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice), the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and the BSW indicator illuminates (yellow) in the vehicle information display. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi- nates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi- cator light is adjusted automatically de- pending on the brightness of the ambient light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-LSD3313

Starting and driving 5-45

tional information, refer to BSW driving situations in this section.

The BSW system automatically turns on every time the engine is started, as long as it is activated using the settings menu on the vehicle information display.

LSD3217

5-46 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Blind Spot and press the OK button.

3. Select Blind Spot Warning and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

The BSW system cannot detect all ve- hicles under all conditions.

The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:

Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.

Oncoming vehicles.

Vehicles remaining in the detec- tion zone when you accelerate from a stop.

A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.

A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.

A vehicle which your vehicle over- takes rapidly.

A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.

When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

The radar sensors detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect ve- hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv- ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.

The radar sensors are designed to ig- nore most stationary objects; how- ever, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may oc- casionally be detected. This is a nor- mal operation condition.

The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:

Severe weather

Road spray

Starting and driving 5-47

Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accesso- ries or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to de- tect other vehicles.

Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing

Another vehicle approaching from behind Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de- tection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

Illustration 1 Approaching from behind LSD2299

5-48 Starting and driving

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

The radar sensors may not detect ve- hicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu- minates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap- proximately 2 seconds.

Illustration 2 Approaching from behind LSD2300

Illustration 3 Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2302

Starting and driving 5-49

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are trav- eling close together.

The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Entering from the side Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu- minates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

Illustration 4 Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2303 Illustration 5 Entering from the side

LSD2305

5-50 Starting and driving

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

Illustration 6 Entering from the side LSD2308

Starting and driving 5-51

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the sys- tem will be deactivated automatically. The Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

The system is not available until the condi- tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi- tion may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen- sors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD3292

5-52 Starting and driving

Malfunction If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle informa- tion display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- sage continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The two radar sensors 1 for the BSW and RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- ent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement NOTICE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by (manufacturer name) may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.

LSD3286

Starting and driving 5-53

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de- signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi- dential installation. This equipment gen- erates, uses and can radiate radio fre- quency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc- tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer- ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is en- couraged to try to correct the interfer- ence by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving an- tenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the RCTA could result in serious injury or death.

The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de- signed to detect other vehicles approach- ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

5-54 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approxi- mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approach- ing from.

LSD3259

Starting and driving 5-55

The RCTA system uses radar sensors 1 installed on both sides near the rear bum- per to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors 1 can detect an ap- proaching vehicle from up to approxi- mately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

LSD2216 LSD3286

5-56 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Rear Cross Traffic Alert and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE: When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3218

Starting and driving 5-57

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:

Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles

A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h)

A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)

The radar sensors may not detect ap- proaching vehicles in certain situations:

Illustration A : When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.

LSD3195

5-58 Starting and driving

Illustration B : When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space.

Illustration C : When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground.

Illustration D : When an approach- ing vehicle turns into your vehicles parking lot aisle.

Illustration E : When the angle formed by your vehicle and ap- proaching vehicle is small.

The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: Severe weather Road spray Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on

the vehicle

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accesso- ries or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to de- tect other vehicles.

Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will in- terfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach- ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo- site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system af- ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1 LSD2043

Illustration 2 LSD2044

Starting and driving 5-59

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the sys- tem will be deactivated automatically. The Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- structing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD3292

5-60 Starting and driving

Malfunction When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system mal- function warning message with the BSW indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the mes- sage continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The two radar sensors 1 for the BSW and RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- ent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement NOTICE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

this device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and

this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by (manufacturer name) may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.

LSD3286

Starting and driving 5-61

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are de- signed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi- dential installation. This equipment gen- erates, uses and can radiate radio fre- quency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc- tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interfer- ence to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is en- couraged to try to correct the interfer- ence by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving an- tenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL 1 RES+ switch

2 CANCEL switch

3 SET switch

4 Cruise control switch

If the cruise control system malfunc- tions, it cancels automatically. The indicator in the instrument panel then blinks to warn the driver.

LSD3251

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

5-62 Starting and driving

If the indicator blinks, turn the cruise control switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The indicator may blink when the cruise control switch is turned on while pushing the RES+, SET, or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise con- trol system, use the following proce- dures.

WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driv- ing under the following conditions:

When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.

In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed.

On winding or hilly roads.

On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS Cruise Control Indicator Color Description

None System off

White Standby

Green Set

Green(Blinking) System fault

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

Starting and driving 5-63

To turn on the cruise control, push the cruise control switch on. The indica- tor in the instrument panel will illuminate. To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- hicle to the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- ously set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods:

Push the CANCEL switch.

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the cruise control switch off. The indicator in the instrument panel goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can- celed if:

You depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES+ or SET switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

You move the shift lever to N (Neutral). To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET switch.

Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.

Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed in- creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it.

Push and hold the SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.

Push and release the SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed de- creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle re- turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

To turn off the cruise control, use one of the following three methods:

Push the CANCEL switch.

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the cruise control switch off. The indicator in the instrument panel goes out.

5-64 Starting and driving

A ICC switch

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the ICC sys- tem could result in serious injury or death.

The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warn- ing or avoidance device. It is the driv- ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.

Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owners Manual thor- oughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent ac- cidents or to control the vehicles speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in ap- propriate road and traffic conditions.

LSD3294

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-65

In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance be- tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.

NOTE:

For vehicles equipped with ProPILOT As- sist, refer to ProPILOT Assist in this sec- tion.

The ICC system maintains a selected dis- tance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver be- tween 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes:

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected dis- tance between your vehicle and the ve- hicle in front of you up to the preset speed

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed

Push the ICC switch A to choose the cruise control mode between the vehicle- to-vehicle distance control mode and the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

Once a control mode is activated, it cannot be changed to the other cruise control mode. To change the mode, push the ICC switch A once to turn the system off. Then push the ICC switch A again to turn the system back on and select the desired cruise control mode.

Always confirm the setting in the ICC sys- tem display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, refer to Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode in this section.

For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, refer to Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode in this section.

5-66 Starting and driving

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CONTROL MODE Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle dis- tance control mode: To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode 1 , quickly push and release the ICC switch A .

Selecting the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: To choose the con- ventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode 2 , push and hold the ICC switch A for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to Conven- tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode in this section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the ICC system automatically main- tains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicles speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and di- rection.

LSD3295 LSD3293

Starting and driving 5-67

If the radar sensor 1 detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will re- duce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to ap- proximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is ap- proximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

LSD3296

5-68 Starting and driving

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE OPERATION The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system will de- celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicles total braking power.

This system should only be used when traf- fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re- main fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may be- come closer because the ICC system can- not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system dis- play to notify the driver to take necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed is below ap- proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also

disengage when the vehicle goes above the maximum set speed.

For additional information, refer to Ap- proach warning in this section.

The following items are controlled in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle de- celerates to a standstill within the limi- tations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime.

When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains ve- hicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traf- fic congestion.

Starting and driving 5-69

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and main- tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to main- tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc- curs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac- cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accel- erate your vehicle when acceleration is re- quired for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us- ing the ICC system.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE SWITCHES The system is operated by the ICC switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras- ing the set speed.

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

SSD0254 LSD3265

5-70 Starting and driving

3. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicles following dis- tance:

Long

Middle

Short

4. ICC switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

5. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode display and indicators The display is located between the speed- ometer and tachometer.

1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color:

ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indi- cates that the ICC switch is on.

ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

ICC system warning (yellow): Indi- cates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis- played in km/h.

3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.

4. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance be- tween vehicles set with the distance switch.

LSD3493

Starting and driving 5-71

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode To turn on the cruise control, quickly push and release the ICC switch A . The ICC sys- tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indi- cator and set vehicle speed indicator B come on in a standby state for setting.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- hicle to the desired speed, push the SET switch C and release it. The ICC system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance indicator and set ve- hicle speed indicator B will come on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

When the SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap- proximately 2 seconds:

When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and a vehicle ahead is not detected

When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or Manual mode

When the parking brake is applied

When the brakes are operated by the driver

LSD3494 LSD3495 LSD3102

5-72 Starting and driving

When the SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up:

When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the ICC switch again.)

For additional information about the VDC system, refer to Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system in this section.

When VDC is operating

When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC system, make sure the wheels are no longer slipping.)

1 System set display with vehicle ahead

2 System set display without vehicle ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC sys- tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi- lar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- ing the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.

NOTE:

The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.

When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve- hicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler- ates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

LSD3496

Starting and driving 5-73

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera- tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system is in operation, the system con- trols the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys- tem will be canceled.

When passing another vehicle, the set speed indicator A will flash when the ve- hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve- hicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelera- tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehicle speed To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods:

Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve- hicle speed indicator will go out.

Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indica- tors will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET switch.

Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approxi- mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

LSD3267

5-74 Starting and driving

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it.

Push and hold the SET switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approxi- mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

Push, then quickly release the SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time depending on the traf- fic conditions.

Each time the distance switch A is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again, in that sequence.

Distance Approximate distance at 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60) 2. Middle 150 (45) 3. Short 90 (30)

The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

The distance setting will remain at the current setting even if the engine is re- started.

LSD2683 LSD2752

Starting and driving 5-75

Approach warning If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve- hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys- tem warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depress- ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve- hicle distance if:

The chime sounds.

The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:

When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.

When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between ve- hicles is increasing.

When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

The vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.

The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your ve- hicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or ve- hicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

Automatic cancellation A chime sounds under the following condi- tions and the control is automatically can- celed:

When the vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill

When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position, Manual mode or L (Low) range.

When the parking brake system is ap- plied

When the VDC system is turned off

When VDC operates

When distance measurement be- comes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor

When a wheel slips

When the radar signal is temporarily in- terrupted

5-76 Starting and driving

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

The ICC system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.

The ICC system will not adapt auto- matically to road conditions. This sys- tem should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or over- come poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the ve- hicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surround- ing circumstances in order to main- tain a safe distance between vehicles.

If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a stand- still and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manu- ally control the proper following dis- tance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance be- tween vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.

The system may not detect the ve- hicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid acci- dents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:

On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves

On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor

On steep downhill roads (the ve- hicle may go beyond the set ve- hicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)

On repeated uphill and downhill roads

When traffic conditions make it dif- ficult to keep a proper distance be- tween vehicles because of fre- quent acceleration or deceleration

Starting and driving 5-77

Interference by other radar sources

Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.

In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys- tem where not recommended in this warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the follow- ing objects:

Stationary and slow moving vehicles

Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot properly detect a ve- hicle ahead and the system may not oper- ate properly:

When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensors detection.

When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati- cally check the sensors operation within the limitations of the system.

When the sensor is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de- tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis- tance detection mode to maintain the se- lected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper dis- tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

5-78 Starting and driving

SSD0252

Starting and driving 5-79

When driving on some roads, such as wind- ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve- hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af- fected by vehicle operation (steering ma- neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0253

5-80 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavail- able. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set:

When the VDC system is turned off

When the VDC operates

When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill

When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive), Manual mode or L (Low) range.

When the parking brake is applied

When a wheel slips

When the radar signal is temporarily in- terruptedLSD3303

Starting and driving 5-81

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ICC switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.

Condition B

When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the ICC system will automatically be can- celed, the chime will sound and the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will ap- pear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle infor- mation display and the system will operate normally. If the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Tempo- rarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warn- ing message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C

When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled.

The chime will sound and the Not Avail- able: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driv- ing Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or For- ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D

When driving on roads with limited road structures (for example, long bridges, des- erts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked message.

Action to take

When the above driving conditions no lon- ger exist, turn the system back on.

Condition E

When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the ICC sys- tem warning light (orange) will come on.

5-82 Starting and driving

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the ve- hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Al- though the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

If the ICC system is temporarily unavail- able, the conventional cruise control mode may still be used. For additional information, please refer to Conven- tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode in this section.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The sensor for the ICC system 1 is located on the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.

Do not attach a sticker (including trans- parent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

LSD3695 LSD3293

Starting and driving 5-83

Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restor- ing the front bumper, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appar- eils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suiv- antes:

1. Lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. Lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor- mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia- tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other an- tenna or transmitter.

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

5-84 Starting and driving

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE This mode allows driving at a speed be- tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with- out keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as nei- ther the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.

Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.

Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:

When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed

In heavy traffic or in traffic that var- ies in speed

On winding or hilly roads

On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

In very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches

1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without eras- ing the set speed

2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally

3. ICC switch: Master switch to activate the system

4. SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally

LSD3271

Starting and driving 5-85

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators The display is located in the vehicle infor- mation display.

1. Cruise indicator: This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color.

Cruise control ON indicator (gray): In- dicates that the ICC switch is on

Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set

Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi- cates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system

2. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC switch A for longer than about 1.5 sec- onds.

When pushing ICC switch on, the conven- tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators B are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Push-

LSD3106 LSD3556

5-86 Starting and driving

ing the ICC switch again will turn the sys- tem completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to ve- hicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC switch off when not using the ICC system.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- C switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the pre- viously set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.

3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.

2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.

LSD3557

Starting and driving 5-87

2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the RES+ switch. The vehicle will re- sume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

LSD3305

5-88 Starting and driving

System temporarily unavailable A chime sounds under the following condi- tions and the control is automatically can- celed:

When the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed

When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode

When the parking brake is applied

When the VDC operates (including the traction control system)

When a wheel slips

When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange.

Action to take

If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and place the shift lever in the P (Park) po- sition. Turn the engine off, restart the en- gine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the ProPI- LOT Assist system could result in seri- ous injury or death.

ProPILOT Assist is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capa- bilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.

The ProPILOT Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving proce- dures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive or absent- minded driving. ProPILOT Assist will not always steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. The ProPILOT Assist sys- tem is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the ve- hicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

PROPILOT ASSIST (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-89

There are limitations to the ProPILOT Assist system capability. The ProPI- LOT Assist system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the drivers responsi- bility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The ProPILOT Assist system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device.

The ProPILOT Assist system is for highway use only and is not intended for city driving. Failure to apply the brakes or steer the vehicle when nec- essary may result in a serious accident.

Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.

Never take your hands off the steering wheel when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely.

Never unfasten your safety belt when using ProPILOT Assist. Doing so auto- matically cancels the ProPILOT Assist system.

The ProPILOT Assist system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles.

Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ProPILOT Assist sys- tem. Read and understand the Own- ers Manual thoroughly before using the ProPILOT Assist system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicles speed in emer- gency situations. Do not use the Pro- PILOT Assist system except in appro- priate road and traffic conditions.

The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction. The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multi- sensing front camera A installed behind the windshield and a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle B to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane and to monitor the lane mark- ers. If the vehicle detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system will also help keep the vehicle centered in the traveling lane when clear lane markings are detected.

LSD3223

5-90 Starting and driving

1 Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)

2 Vehicle information display

3 Steering-wheel-mounted control (right)

4 ProPILOT Assist switch

PROPILOT ASSIST SYSTEM OPERATION The ProPILOT Assist system has the follow- ing two functions:

1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes:

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a pre- set speed

NOTE:

Steering Assist is not available in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

LSD3224

Starting and driving 5-91

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be se- lected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). When the vehicle ahead slows to a stop, your vehicle gradually decelerates to a standstill. When the vehicle is stopped, the ICC system maintains braking force to keep your vehicle stopped.

NOTE:

When your vehicle is stopped for less than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to move, your vehicle will start moving again automatically.

When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly de- press the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead.

When no vehicle is detected ahead within the driver selected distance, the vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The speed must be above 20 mph (32 km/h) to use this function.

NOTE:

Even if the Automatic Emergency Brak- ing (AEB) setting is turned off by the driver using the Settings menu in the vehicle information display, AEB will be automatically turned on when ICC is used.

2. Steering Assist

The Steering Assist function controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle within the traveling lane.

When there is no vehicle ahead, Steer- ing Assist is not available at speeds under 37 mph (60 km/h).

ProPILOT Assist switches

1 DISTANCE switch:

Long

Middle

Short

2 RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally

3 CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist sys- tem

LSD3225

5-92 Starting and driving

4 ProPILOT Assist switch:

Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or off

5 SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally

6 Steering Assist switch:

Turns the Steering Assist function on or off

The ProPILOT Assist system display and indicators

1 Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects lane markers

No lane markers displayed: Steering Assist is turned off

Lane marker indicator (gray): No lane markers detected

Lane marker indicator (green): Lane markers detected

Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane departure is detected

2 Set distance indicator

Displays the selected distance

3 Vehicle ahead detection indicator

Indicates whether the system detects a vehicle in front of you

4 Steering Assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering As- sist function by the color of the indica- tor

Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby

Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active

Steering Assist indicator (orange): Steering Assist malfunction

5 ProPILOT Assist activation

Displays once the ProPILOT Assist sys- tem is activated

LSD3226 LSD3227

Starting and driving 5-93

6 ProPILOT Assist status indicator

Indicates the status of the ProPILOT Assist system by the color of the indi- cator

ProPILOT Assist status indicator (white): ProPILOT Assist is on but in standby.

ProPILOT Assist status indicator (blue): ProPILOT Assist active

7 Steering Assist status indicator/warning

Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator/warning

No Steering Assist status indicator displayed: Steering Assist is turned off

Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby

Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active

Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction

8 Set vehicle speed indicator

Indicates the set vehicle speed

9 Speed control status indicator/warning

Displays the status of speed control by the color and shape of the indicator/warning

Speed control status indicator/ warning (gray): ICC standby

Speed control status indicator/ warning (solid green ): ICC (dis- tance control mode) is active (ve- hicle detected ahead). Your vehicle matches the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Speed control status indicator/ warning (green outline ): ICC (maintain speed control mode) is active (no vehicle detected ahead). Your vehicle maintains the driver- selected set speed.

Speed control status indicator/ warning (orange): Indicates an ICC malfunction

TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE ON

NOTE:

ProPILOT Assist provides no approach warnings, automatic braking, or steering assist in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode. To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ProPILOT Assist switch for longer than ap- proximately 1.5 seconds. For additional in- formation, refer to Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode in this section.

5-94 Starting and driving

1. Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)

2. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) when shaded and Intelligent Lane Interven- tion (I-LI) when solid

3. Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

OPERATING PROPILOT ASSIST 1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch A .

This turns on the ProPILOT Assist sys- tem.

2. A screen is displayed for a period of time that indicates the status of the driving aid functions.

AEB, LDW, and BSW are enabled when the specified driving aid is shaded.

I-LI is enabled when the driving aid is solid.

To change the status of the driving aids, use the 1 or 2 but- ton to navigate the settings screen. For additional information, refer to How to use the vehicle information display in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

3. The status of the ProPILOT Assist sys- tem is displayed in the vehicle informa- tion display B .

4. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle to the desired speed.

LSD3311 LSD3228 LSD3074

Starting and driving 5-95

5. Push the SET- switch C . The ProPILOT Assist system begins to automatically maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT Assist activation indicator D and Pro- PILOT Assist status indicator E illumi- nate (blue). When a vehicle ahead is traveling at a speed of 20 mph (32 km/h) or below and the SET- switch is pushed, the set speed of your vehicle is 20 mph (32 km/h).

NOTE:

When Lane Departure Prevention is en- abled in the settings menu, turning the ProPILOT Assist system (if so equipped) on will activate the I-LI system at the same time. If Lane Departure Prevention is not enabled in the settings menu, I-LI will automatically activate when the Pro- PILOT Assist system is SET. For addi- tional information, refer to Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) in this section.

When the SET- switch is pushed under the following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist system cannot be set and the set vehicle speed indicator 1 blinks for approximately 2 seconds:

When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not detected

When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode

When the parking brake is applied

When the brakes are operated by the driver

LSD3229 LSD3230

5-96 Starting and driving

When the VDC system is off. For addi- tional information, refer to Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system in this sec- tion.

When the VDC system (including the traction control system) is operating

When a wheel is slipping

When any door is open

When the drivers seat belt is not fas- tened

How to change the set vehicle speed The set vehicle speed can be adjusted.

To change to a faster cruising speed:

Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed increases by approxi- mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

Push, then quickly release, the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To change to a slower cruising speed:

Push and hold the SET- switch. The set vehicle speed decreases by approxi- mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

Push, then quickly release, the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

How to momentarily accelerate or decelerate

Depress the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required. Release the ac- celerator pedal to resume the previ- ously set vehicle speed.

Depress the brake pedal when decel- eration is required. Control by the ProPI- LOT Assist system is canceled. Push the RES+ switch to resume the previously set vehicle speed.

LSD3113

Starting and driving 5-97

WARNING When the accelerator pedal is de- pressed and you are approaching the vehicle ahead, the ICC system will nei- ther control the brake nor warn the driver with the chime and display. The driver must manually control the ve- hicle speed to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do so could result in severe personal injury or death.

NOTE:

When you accelerate by depressing the accelerator pedal or decelerate by push- ing the SET- switch and the vehicle trav- els faster than the speed set by the driver, the set speed vehicle indicator will blink.

How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time.

Each time the DISTANCE switch A is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence.

LSD3114

5-98 Starting and driving

Distance Approximate distance at 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60) 2. Middle 150 (45) 3. Short 90 (30)

The distance to the vehicle ahead changes automatically according to the vehicle speed. The higher the ve- hicle speed, the longer the distance.

The distance setting will remain at the current setting even if the engine is re- started.

LSD2806

Starting and driving 5-99

1 Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)

2 Vehicle information display

3 Steering Assist switch

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE STEERING ASSIST Use the following methods to enable or disable the Steering Assist.

Steering Assist switch:

To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push the Steering Assist switch 3 on the instru- ment panel.

NOTE:

When the Steering Assist switch is used to turn the system on or off, the system remembers the setting even if the ignition switch is cycled. The switch must be pushed again to change the setting to on or off.

The Steering Assist switch changes the status of the Steering Assist se- lection made in the Settings screen in the vehicle information display.

LSD3231

5-100 Starting and driving

Setting in the vehicle information dis- play:

1. Press the button on the steering wheel 1 until Settings displays in the vehicle information display 2 .

2. Use the button 1 to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button 1 .

3. Use the button 1 to select Steering Assist and then press the OK button 1 to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

When the Cruise screen is displayed on the vehicle information display, press the OK button on the steering wheel to call up the Driving Aids set- ting display.

When enabling/disabling the system through the vehicle information dis- play or when pushing the Steering Assist switch, the system retains the current settings even if the engine is restarted.

How to cancel the ProPILOT Assist system To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use one of the following methods:

Push the CANCEL switch.

Tap the brake pedal (except at a stand- still).

Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system off. The ProPILOT Assist sta- tus indicator will go out.

When the ProPILOT Assist system is can- celed while the vehicle is stopped, the elec- tronic parking brake is automatically acti- vated.

WARNING To prevent the vehicle from moving or rolling unexpectedly, which could result in serious personal injury or property damage, before exiting the vehicle make sure to push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system off, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the ICC sys- tem could result in serious injury or death.

The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warn- ing or avoidance device. It is recom- mended for highway use only and it is not intended for city driving. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

There are limitations to the ICC sys- tem capability. The ICC system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.

Starting and driving 5-101

The ICC system does not react to sta- tionary and slow moving vehicles.

Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owners Manual thor- oughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent ac- cidents or to control the vehicles speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in ap- propriate road and traffic conditions.

ICC system operation The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system decel- erates the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicles total braking power. This system should only be used when traffic condi- tions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the travel- ing lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance be- tween vehicles may become closer be-

cause the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system sounds a warning chime and blinks the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.

The ICC system cancels and a warning chime sounds if the speed is below ap- proximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead.

The ICC system operates as follows:

When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve- hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC system keeps the vehicle stopped.

When your vehicle is stopped for less than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to move, your vehicle will start moving again automatically.

When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accel- erator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle traveling ahead moves to a different traveling lane, the ICC system accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traf- fic congestion.

5-102 Starting and driving

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system accelerates and maintains the speed up to the set speed. Pay atten- tion to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc- curs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, the system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac- cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly accel- erate your vehicle when acceleration is re- quired for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

No vehicle detected ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC sys- tem maintains the set vehicle speed, simi- lar to standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed.

SSD0254 System set display with no vehicle de-

tected ahead

LSD3316

Starting and driving 5-103

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- ing the brakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The ICC system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.

NOTE:

The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.

When the brake is applied by the sys- tem, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When the ICC system detects a vehicle ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indica- tor and the speed control status indicator (distance control mode) illuminates (solid green ).

Vehicle ahead stops When the vehicle ahead decelerates to stop, your vehicle decelerates to a stand- still. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC sys- tem automatically applies the brakes to keep the vehicle stopped. When your ve- hicle is at a standstill, the (RES+) Press to start message is displayed on the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

When your vehicle stops for less than 3 seconds, your vehicle will automati- cally follow the vehicle as it accelerates from a stop.

Vehicle ahead accelerates

When your vehicle is stopped and the ve- hicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelera- tor pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler- ates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off and speed control status indicator (main- tain speed control mode) illuminates (green outline ). The ICC system gradually accelerates to the set speed, but you can depress the accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate. When a vehicle is no longer detected and your vehicle is traveling under approxi- mately 15 mph (24 km/h), the ICC system automatically cancels.

System set display with vehicle ahead LSD3233

5-104 Starting and driving

When passing another vehicle, the set speed indicator A flashes when the ve- hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve- hicle ahead detection indicator turns off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle re- turns to the previously set speed. Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

Cut-in detection If a vehicle moves into your traveling lane near your vehicle, the ICC system may in-

form the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator.

Approach warning If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve- hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys- tem warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depress- ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve- hicle distance if:

The chime sounds.

The vehicle ahead detection indicator and set distance indicator blink.

You judge it necessary to maintain a safe distance.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:

When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.

When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between ve- hicles is increasing.

When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.

The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may flash when the radar sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The radar sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding, narrow, or hilly roads or when the vehicle is entering or exiting a curve. In these cases, you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your ve- hicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af- fected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions (for ex- ample, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

LSD3234

Starting and driving 5-105

Acceleration when passing When the ICC system is engaged above 37 mph and following a slower vehicle (be- low ICC set speed), and the turn signal is activated to the left, the ICC system will automatically start to accelerate the ve- hicle to help initiate passing on the left and will begin to reduce the distance to vehicle directly ahead. Only the left side turn signal operates this feature. As the driver steers the vehicle and moves into the passing lane, if no vehicle is detected ahead the ICC system will continue to accelerate to the ICC system set speed. If another vehicle is detected ahead, then the vehicle will accel- erate up to the following speed of that ve- hicle. If the vehicle is not steered into the left lane to pass, the acceleration will stop after a short time and regain the set follow- ing distance. Acceleration can be stopped at any point by depressing the brake pedal or the CANCEL switch on the steering wheel.

WARNING In order to reduce the risk of a collision that may result in serious injury or death, please be aware of the following:

This function is only activated with the left turn signal and will briefly ac- celerate the vehicle even if a lane change is not initiated. This can in- clude non-passing situations such as left side exits.

Ensure that when passing another ve- hicle, the adjacent lane is clear before initiating the pass. Sudden changes in traffic may occur while passing- al- ways manually steer or brake as needed- never solely rely on the system.

ICC system limitations

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death:

The ICC system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.

The ICC system will not adapt auto- matically to road conditions. This sys- tem should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, de- pending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circum- stances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

When the ICC system automatically brings the car to a stop, your vehicle can automatically accelerate if the ve- hicle is stopped for less than approxi- mately 3 seconds. Be prepared to stop your vehicle if necessary.

5-106 Starting and driving

Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manu- ally control the proper following dis- tance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance be- tween vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.

The system may not detect the ve- hicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid acci- dents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:

On roads with heavy, high-speed traffic or sharp curves

On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor

On steep downhill roads (the ve- hicle may go beyond the set ve- hicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)

On repeated uphill and downhill roads

When traffic conditions make it dif- ficult to keep a proper distance be- tween vehicles because of fre- quent acceleration or deceleration

Interference by other radar sources.

Do not use the ICC system if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.

In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys- tem where not recommended in this warning section.

The ICC system will not detect the following objects:

Stationary or slow moving vehicles

Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

The following are some conditions in which the radar sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not op- erate properly:

When the sensor detection is reduced (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)

Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves

Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road

If dirt, ice, snow or other material is cov- ering the radar sensor area

A complicated-shaped vehicle such as a car carrier trailer or flatbed truck/trailer is near the vehicle ahead.

Interference by other radar sources

When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc.

When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati- cally check the radar sensors operation within the limitations of the system.

Starting and driving 5-107

The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de- tection zone for the ICC system to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the center line of the lane. A vehicle that is en- tering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

The ICC system (with ProPILOT Assist) uses a multi-sensing front camera. The follow- ing are some conditions in which the cam- era may not properly detect a vehicle and detection of a vehicle ahead may be de- layed:

Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)

The camera area of the windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera

A sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or shaded area or light- ning flashes)

5-108 Starting and driving

SSD0252

Starting and driving 5-109

When driving on some roads, such as wind- ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are under construction, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a ve- hicle traveling ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af- fected by vehicle operation (steering ma- neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper dis- tance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

System Temporarily Unavailable The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavail- able. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC sys- tem is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set:

Any door is open.

The drivers seat belt is not fastened.

The vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).

Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC system for approximately 3 minutes or longer.

The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) po- sition or manual shift mode.

The electronic parking brake is applied.

The VDC system is turned off.

The AEB applies harder braking.

VDC (including the traction control sys- tem) operates.

A wheel slips.

When the radar signal is temporarily in- terrupted.

SSD0253

5-110 Starting and driving

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the ProPILOT Assist switch. Turn the ProPI- LOT Assist system back on to use the sys- tem.

NOTE:

When the ICC system is canceled under the following conditions at a standstill, the electronic parking brake is auto- matically activated:

Any door is open.

The drivers seat belt is not fastened.

Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC system for approximately 3 min- utes or longer.

The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode.

The VDC system is turned off.

When distance measurement be- comes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor.

When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.

Condition B

When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the ICC system will automatically be can- celed, the chime will sound and the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will ap- pear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle infor- mation display and the system will operate normally. If the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Tempo- rarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warn- ing message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C

When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the ICC system will automati- cally be canceled.

The chime will sound and the Not Avail- able: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driv- ing Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or For- ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked message.

Starting and driving 5-111

Action to take:

When the above driving conditions no lon- ger exist, turn the system back on.

ICC system malfunction If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, and the speed control status warn- ing (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, stop the ve- hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine and set the ICC system again. If it is not possible to set the ICC system or the indicator stays on, it may be a malfunction. Although the normal driving can be continued, the ICC system should

be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

If the ICC system is temporarily unavail- able, the conventional cruise control mode may still be used. For additional information, please refer to Conven- tional (fixed speed) cruise control mode in this section.

ICC sensor maintenance The radar sensor is located on the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.

Do not attach a sticker (including trans- parent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

LSD3695

5-112 Starting and driving

Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper.

Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

The camera sensor is located above the inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the sys- tems and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the windshield clean.

Do not attach a sticker (including trans- parent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera units capability of detecting the lane mark- ers.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

STEERING ASSIST

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the Steer- ing Assist could result in serious injury or death.

The Steering Assist is not a replace- ment for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct care- less, inattentive or absent-minded driving. The Steering Assist will not al- ways steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. It is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is the drivers responsibil- ity to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

As there is a performance limit to the Steering Assists capability, never rely solely on the system. The Steering As- sist does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. Always drive safely, pay attention to the operation of the vehicle, and manually control your vehicle appropriately.

The Steering Assist is intended for use on well-developed freeways or high- ways with gentle (moderate) curves. To avoid risk of an accident, do not use this system on local or non-highway roads.

The Steering Assist only steers the ve- hicle to maintain its position in the center of a lane. The vehicle will not steer to avoid objects in the road in front of the vehicle or to avoid a ve- hicle moving into your lane.

It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. Never take your hands off the steering wheel when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely.

Starting and driving 5-113

Always drive carefully and attentively when using the Steering Assist. Read and understand the Owners Manual thoroughly before using the Steering Assist. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the ve- hicles speed in emergency situations. Do not use the Steering Assist except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

Steering Assist operation The Steering Assist controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle near the center of the lane when driving. The Steer- ing Assist is combined with the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional information, refer to Intelligent Cruise Con- trol (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) in this section.

The Steering Assist can be activated when the following conditions are met:

The ICC system is activated.

Lane markers on both sides are clearly detected.

A vehicle ahead is detected (when the vehicle is driven at speeds under 37 mph [60 km/h]).

The driver grips the steering wheel.

The vehicle is driven at the center of the lane.

The turn signals are not operated.

The windshield wiper is not operated in the high (HI) speed operation (the Steer- ing Assist function is disabled after the wiper operates for approximately 10 seconds).

Steering Assist display and indicators 1 Steering Assist status indicator/

warning

Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator/ warning

Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steer- ing Assist standby

Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active

Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction

LSD3235

5-114 Starting and driving

2 Steering Assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering As- sist by the color of the indicator

Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steer- ing Assist standby

Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active

3 Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects the lane marker

Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane markers not detected

Lane marker indicator (green): Lane markers detected

Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane departure is detected

When the Steering Assist is in operation, the Steering Assist status indicator 1 , the Steering Assist indicator 2 , and the lane marker indicator 3 on the vehicle infor- mation display turn green. A chime sounds when the Steering Assist initially activates.

When the Steering Assist deactivates, the Steering Assist status indicator 1 , the Steering Assist indicator 2 , and the lane marker indicator 3 on the vehicle infor-

mation display turn gray and a chime sounds twice.

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds the capabilities of the Steering Assist and your vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the I-LI indicator (orange) on the instrument panel flashes to alert the driver. Then, the I-LI sys- tem automatically applies the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. This action is in addition to any Steering Assist actions.

Starting and driving 5-115

Hands on detection When the Steering Assist is activated, it monitors the drivers steering wheel opera- tion.

If the steering wheel is not operated or the driver takes his/her hands off the steering wheel for a period of time, the warning 1 appears in the vehicle information display.

If the driver does not operate the steering wheel after the warning has been dis- played, an audible alert sounds and the warning flashes in the vehicle information display, followed by a quick brake applica- tion to request the driver to take control of the vehicle again.

If the driver still does not respond, the Pro- PILOT Assist turns on the hazard flasher and slows the vehicle to a complete stop.

The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by steering, braking, accelerating, or operating the ProPILOT Assist switch.

LSD3236

5-116 Starting and driving

WARNING Steering Assist is not a system for hands-free driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely. Failure to do so could cause a collision resulting in seri- ous personal injury or death.

NOTE:

If the driver lightly touches (instead of firmly grips) the steering wheel, the steering torque sensor may not detect the drivers hand(s) on the wheel and a sequence of warnings may occur. When the driver holds and operates the steer- ing wheel again, the warnings turn off.

Steering Assist limitations

WARNING In the following situations, the cam-

era may not detect lane markers cor- rectly or may detect lane markers in- correctly and the Steering Assist may not operate properly:

When driving on roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers, lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly, nonstandard lane markers, or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

When driving on roads with dis- continued lane markers

When driving on roads with a wid- ening or narrowing lane width

When driving on roads where there are multiple lanes or unclear lane markers due to road construction

When driving on roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams, or lines remain- ing after road repairs (the Steering Assist could detect these items as lane markers)

When driving on roads where the traveling lane merges or separates

Do not use the Steering Assist under the following conditions because the system may not properly detect lane markers. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, dust, etc.)

When rain, snow, sand, etc., is thrown up by the wheels of other vehicles

When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or another object adheres to the camera unit

When the lens of the camera unit is foggy

When strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from on- coming vehicles) shines on the camera

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or the head- lights are off in tunnels or darkness

When a sudden change in bright- ness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or is under a bridge)

Starting and driving 5-117

When driving on roads where the traveling lane merges or separates or where there are temporary lane markers because of road construction

When there is a lane closure due to road repairs

When driving on a bumpy road sur- face, such as an uneven dirt road

When driving on sharp curves or winding roads

When driving on repeated uphill and downhill roads

Do not use the Steering Assist under the following conditions because the system will not operate properly:

When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, abnormal tire pressure, installation of a spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels)

When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake or suspension parts

When an object such as a sticker or cargo obstructs the camera

When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or lug- gage area of your vehicle

When the vehicle load capacity is exceeded

When towing a trailer or other vehicle

Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the beep may not be heard.

For the ProPILOT Assist system to op- erate properly, the windshield in front of the camera must be clean. Replace worn wiper blades. The correct size wiper blades must be used to help make sure the windshield is kept clean. Only use Genuine NISSAN wiper blades, or equivalent wiper blades, that are specifically designed for use on your vehicle model and model year. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the correct parts for your vehicle.

Steering Assist temporary standby Automatic standby due to driving opera- tion:

When the driver activates the turn signal, the Steering Assist is temporarily placed in a standby mode. (The Steering Assist re- starts automatically when the operating conditions are met again.)

Automatic standby:

In the following cases, a warning message is displayed along with the chime, and the Steering Assist is placed in a temporary standby mode. (The Steering Assist re- starts automatically when the operating conditions are met again.)

When lane markers on both sides are no longer detected

When a vehicle ahead is no longer de- tected under approximately 37 mph (60 km/h)

5-118 Starting and driving

Steering Assist cancel Under the following conditions, the Steer- ing Assist cancels, and the Steering Assist status indicator and the Steering Assist in- dicator turn off:

When unusual lane markers appear in the traveling lane or when the lane marker cannot be correctly detected for some time due to certain conditions (for example, a snow rut, the reflection of light on a rainy day, the presence of several unclear lane markers)

When the windshield wiper operates in the high (HI) speed operation (the Steer- ing Assist is disabled when the wiper operates for more than approximately 10 seconds)

Action to take:

Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL switch. When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the ICC system on again.

Steering Assist malfunction When the system malfunctions, it turns off automatically. The Steering Assist status warning illuminates (orange). A chime may sound depending on the situation.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en- gine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and set the Intelligent Cruise Control sys- tem again. If the warning (orange) contin- ues to illuminate, the Steering Assist is mal- functioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Steering Assist maintenance The camera sensor is located above the inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the windshield clean.

Do not attach a sticker (including trans- parent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera units capability of detecting the lane markers.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-119

For Canada

Model: ARS4B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appar- eils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suiv- antes:

1. Lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. Lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioelectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor- mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia- tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other an- tenna or transmitter.

Cet equipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements IC etablies pour un environnement non controle. Cet equipement doit etre installe et utilise avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE

NOTE:

ProPILOT Assist provides no approach warnings, automatic braking, or steering assist in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

This mode allows driving at a speed be- tween 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) with- out keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING In the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as nei- ther the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.

Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.

5-120 Starting and driving

Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:

When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed

In heavy traffic or in traffic that var- ies in speed

On winding or hilly roads

On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

In very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches

1 RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally

2 CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without eras- ing the set speed

3 ProPILOT Assist switch: Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or off

4 SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally

LSD3120

Starting and driving 5-121

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators The display is located in the vehicle infor- mation display.

1. Set vehicle speed indicator: This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

2. Cruise indicator: This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color.

Cruise control ON indicator (gray): In- dicates that the ProPILOT Assist switch is on

Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set

Cruise control warning (yellow): Indi- cates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system

Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ProPILOT Assist switch A for longer than about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators B are displayed in the vehicle information dis- play. After you hold the ProPILOT Assist switch on for longer than about 1.5 sec- onds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set

LSD3283 LSD3284

5-122 Starting and driving

your desired cruising speed. Pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ProPILOT Assist switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off when not using the ICC system.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- hicle to the desired speed, push the SET- C switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the pre- viously set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.

2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.

3. Turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.

2. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.

3. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

LSD3285

Starting and driving 5-123

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.

2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the RES+ switch. The vehicle will re- sume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.

The RAB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for proper driving procedures. Always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move before and while backing up. Never rely solely on the RAB system. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

There is a limitation to the RAB system capability. The RAB system is not ef- fective in all situations.

The RAB system can assist the driver when the vehicle is backing up and approaching objects directly behind the vehicle.

The RAB system detects obstacles behind the vehicle using the parking sensors 1 located on the rear bumper.

NOTE:

You can temporarily cancel the sonar function in the vehicle, but the RAB sys- tem will continue to operate. For addi- tional information, please refer to Rear Sonar System (RSS) in this section.

LSD3241

REAR AUTOMATIC BRAKING (RAB) (if so equipped)

5-124 Starting and driving

1 RAB system warning light and RAB sys- tem warning indicator

2 Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

3 Center display

RAB SYSTEM OPERATION When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), the RAB system operates. If a risk of a collision with an obstacle is de- tected when your vehicle is backing up, the RAB system warning indicator will flash in the vehicle information display, a red frame will appear in the center display (for vehicles with the Intelligent Around View Monitor sys- tem), and the system will chime three times. The system will then automatically apply the brakes. After the automatic brake applica- tion, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure.

NOTE:

The brake lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the RAB system.

When the brakes operate, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.LSD3279

Starting and driving 5-125

TURNING THE RAB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the RAB system ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Emergency Brake and press the OK button.

3. To set the RAB system to on or off, use the OK button to check the box for Rear.

When the RAB system is turned off, the RAB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The RAB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

LSD3237

5-126 Starting and driving

RAB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the RAB system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RAB system could result in serious injury or death.

When the vehicle approaches an ob- stacle while the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed, the function may not operate or the start of operation may be delayed. The RAB system may not operate or may not perform suffi- ciently due to vehicle conditions, driv- ing conditions, the traffic environ- ment, the weather, road surface conditions, etc. Do not wait for the system to operate. Operate the brake pedal by yourself as soon as necessary.

If it is necessary to override RAB op- eration, strongly press the accelerator pedal.

Always check your surroundings and turn to check what is behind you be- fore and while backing up. The RAB system detects stationary objects be- hind the vehicle. The RAB system does not detect the following objects:

Moving objects

Low objects

Narrow objects

Wedge-shaped objects

Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])

Objects that suddenly appear

Thin objects such as rope, wire, chain, etc.

The RAB system may not operate for the following obstacles:

Obstacles located high off the ground

Obstacles in a position offset from your vehicle

Obstacles, such as spongy materi- als or snow, that have soft outer surfaces and can easily absorb a sound wave

The RAB system may not operate in the following conditions:

There is rain, snow, ice, dirt, etc., at- tached to the sonar sensors.

A loud sound is heard in the area around the vehicle.

The surface of the obstacle is di- agonal to the rear of the vehicle.

The RAB system may unintentionally operate in the following conditions:

There is overgrown grass in the area around the vehicle.

There is a structure (e.g., a wall, toll gate equipment, a narrow tunnel, a parking lot gate) near the side of the vehicle.

There are bumps, protrusions, or manhole covers on the road surface.

The vehicle drives through a draped flag or a curtain.

There is an accumulation of snow or ice behind the vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-127

An ultrasonic wave source, such as another vehicles sonar, is near the vehicle.

Once the automatic brake control op- erates, it does not operate again if the vehicle approaches the same obstacle.

The automatic brake control can only operate for a short period of time. Therefore, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

In the following situations, the RAB system may not operate properly or may not function sufficiently:

The vehicle is driven in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

The vehicle is driven on a steep hill.

The vehicles posture is changed (e.g., when driving over a bump).

The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.

The vehicle is turned sharply by turning the steering wheel fully.

Snow chains are used.

Wheels or tires other than NISSAN recommended are used.

The brakes are cold at low ambient temperatures or immediately after driving has started.

The braking force becomes poor due to wet brakes after driving through a puddle or washing the vehicle.

Turn the RAB system off in the follow- ing conditions to prevent the occur- rence of an unexpected accident re- sulting from sudden system operation:

The vehicle is towed.

The vehicle is carried on a flatbed truck.

The vehicle is on the chassis dynamometer.

The vehicle drives on an uneven road surface.

Suspension parts other than those designated as Genuine NISSAN parts are used. (If the vehicle height or the vehicle body inclina- tion is changed, the system may not detect an obstacle correctly.)

Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, an open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the RAB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, the RAB system warning light will illuminate, and the Sys- tem fault warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light illuminates, park the ve- hicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the RAB sys- tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-128 Starting and driving

NOTE:

If the RAB system cannot be operated temporarily, the RAB system warning light blinks.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Observe the following items to ensure proper operation of the system:

Always keep the parking sensors 1 clean.

If the parking sensors are dirty, wipe them off with a soft cloth while being careful to not damage them.

Do not subject the area around the parking sensors 1 to strong impact. Also, do not remove or disassemble the parking sensors. If the parking sensors and peripheral areas are deformed in an accident, etc., have the sensors checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Do not install any stickers (including transparent stickers) or accessories on the parking sensors 1 and their sur- rounding areas. This may cause a mal- function or improper operation.

LSD3241

Starting and driving 5-129

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the AEB system could result in serious injury or death.

The AEB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the drivers attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.

The AEB system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.

The AEB system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The AEB system uses a radar sensor 1 located on the front of the vehicle to mea- sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD3293

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (if so equipped)

5-130 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB emergency warning indicator

3. AEB system warning light

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION The AEB system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi- mately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB system will provide an initial warn- ing to the driver by both a visual and au- dible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB system detects that there is still the possi- bility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual warning and audible warning and also applies par- tial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB system applies harder braking au- tomatically.

While the AEB system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB system is operating properly.LSD3281

Starting and driving 5-131

NOTE:

The vehicles brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a colli- sion, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accel- erating or braking, the AEB system will function later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:

When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to avoid a collision.

When the accelerator pedal is de- pressed.

When there is no longer a vehicle de- tected ahead.

If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD3237

5-132 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the AEB system ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Emergency Brake and press the OK button.

3. Select Front and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The AEB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is re- started.

The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system There is not a sepa- rate selection in the vehicle informa- tion display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

The AEB system cannot detect all ve- hicles under all conditions.

The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:

Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway.

Oncoming vehicles.

Crossing vehicles.

The radar sensor has some perfor- mance limitations. If a stationary ve- hicle is in the vehicless path, the AEB system will not function when the ve- hicle is driven at speeds over approxi- mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

The radar sensor may not detect a ve- hicle ahead in the following conditions:

Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.

Interference by other radar sources.

Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.

If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g. motorcycle).

When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

In some road or traffic conditions, the AEB system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.

Braking distances increase on slip- pery surfaces.

Starting and driving 5-133

The system is designed to automati- cally check the sensors functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of ob- structions of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to worn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

LSD3238

5-134 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer- ence from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the AEB system will automatically be can- celed, the chime will sound and the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will ap- pear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle infor- mation display. If the Not Available: Front

Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C

When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the AEB system will automati- cally be canceled. The chime will sound and the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will appear in the vehicle information dis- play.

Action to take:

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or For- ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked message.

Action to take:

When the above driving conditions no lon- ger exist, turn the system back on.

NOTE:

If the AEB system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.

Starting and driving 5-135

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Mal- function] will appear in the vehicle informa- tion display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- ing light continues to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The sensor 1 for the AEB is located on the front of the vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.

Do not cover or attach stickers or simi- lar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

LSD3695 LSD3293

5-136 Starting and driving

Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restor- ing the front bumper, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digi- tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful in- terference when the equipment is oper- ated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radi- ate radio frequency energy and, if not in- stalled and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful in- terference to radio communications. Op- eration of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own ex- pense.

Radio frequency radiation exposure infor- mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia- tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other an- tenna or transmitter.

For Canada

Model: ARS4B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the de- vice.

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appar- eils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suiv- antes:

1. Lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. Lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

Starting and driving 5-137

Radio frequency radiation exposure infor- mation:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other an- tenna or transmitter.

Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl.

Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the drivers attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It can- not prevent accidents due to care- lessness or dangerous driving techniques.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driv- ing, traffic, weather and road conditions.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane or with a pedestrian ahead in the traveling lane.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle B to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the AEB with Pedestrian De- tection system uses a camera installed be- hind the windshield A in addition to the radar sensor.

LSD3223

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION (if so equipped)

5-138 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB with Pedestrian Detection emer- gency warning indicator

3. AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM OPERATION The AEB system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). For the pe- destrian detection function, the system operates at speeds between 6 37 mph (10 60 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will firstly provide the warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection in- dicator (yellow) in the vehicle information display and providing an audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and force- fully after the warning, and the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward col- lision, the system will automatically in- crease the braking force.

If the driver does not take action, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system issues the second visual (flashing) (red and white)LSD3281

Starting and driving 5-139

and audible warning. If the driver releases the accelerator pedal, then the system ap- plies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB with Pedes- trian Detection system applies harder braking automatically.

While the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating, you may hear the sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is operating properly.

NOTE:

The vehicles brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the sys- tem may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the conse- quences if a collision should be unavoid- able. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will function later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:

When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision.

When the accelerator pedal is de- pressed.

When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead.

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- tem has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

5-140 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to enable or disable the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Emergency Brake and press the OK button.

3. Select Front and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the AEB with Pedes- trian Detection system warning light illumi- nates.

LSD3237

Starting and driving 5-141

NOTE:

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selec- tion in the vehicle information display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB system is turned off, the I-FCW sys- tem is also turned off.

AEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limita- tions could result in serious injury or death.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following objects:

Small pedestrians (including small children), animals and cyclists.

Pedestrians in wheelchairs or us- ing mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards.

Pedestrians who are seated or oth- erwise not in a full upright stand- ing or walking position.

Oncoming vehicles

Crossing vehicles

Obstacles on the roadside

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.

If a stationary vehicle is in the vehi- cles path, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

For pedestrian detection, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approxi- mately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function for pedestri- ans in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area.

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the vehicle ahead is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).

The AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the speed difference between the two vehicles is too small.

The radar sensor AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:

Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sand- storms, and road spray from other vehicles)

5-142 Starting and driving

Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road.

If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area.

Interference by other radar sources.

The camera area of the windshield is fogged up, or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming ve- hicles) enters the front camera. Strong light causes the area around the pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see.

A sudden change in brightness oc- curs. (For example, when the ve- hicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.)

The poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.

The pedestrians profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable due to the pedestrian transporting lug- gage, wearing bulky or very loose- fitting clothing or accessories.

The system performance may de- grade in the following conditions:

The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.

The vehicle is driven on a slope.

Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk room of your vehicle.

The system is designed to automati- cally check the sensors (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not de- tect blockage of sensor areas covered by ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.

In some road and traffic conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply par- tial braking. When acceleration is nec- essary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-143

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A:

In the following conditions, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically:

The radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source.

The camera area of the windshield is misted or frozen.

Strong light is shining from the front.

The cabin temperature is over approxi- mately 104F (40C) in direct sunlight.

The camera area of the windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.

LSD3238

5-144 Starting and driving

NOTE:

When the inside of the windshield on the camera area is misted or frozen, it will take a period of time to remove it after the A/C turns on. If dirt appears on this area, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Condition B:

When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the ICC system will automatically be can- celed, the chime will sound and the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will ap- pear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle infor- mation display. If the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C:

When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the AEB with Pedestrian Detec- tion system will automatically be canceled. The chime will sound and the Not Avail- able: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driv- ing Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take:

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or For- ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D:

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked message.

Action to take:

When the above driving conditions no lon- ger exist, turn the system back on.

NOTE:

If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- tem stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.

Starting and driving 5-145

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the AEB with Pedestrian Detection sys- tem malfunctions, it will be turned off auto- matically, a chime will sound, the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en- gine off and restart the engine. If the warn- ing light continues to illuminate, have the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The radar sensor is located on the front of the vehicle B . The camera is located on the upper side of the windshield A .

To keep the AEB with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to ob- serve the following:

Always keep the sensor areas of the front bumper/emblem and windshield clean.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (e.g., bumper, wind- shield).

LSD3695 LSD3223

5-146 Starting and driving

Do not cover or attach stickers, or install any accessory near the sensors. This could block sensor signals and/or cause failure or malfunction.

Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instru- ment panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera units detection capability.

Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restor- ing the front bumper, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement For USA

FCC ID OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

Model: ARS4B

IC: 4135A-ARS4B

FCC ID: OAYARS4B

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera- tion is subject to the following two con- ditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer- ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. Lutilisateur de lappareil doit ac- cepter tout brouillage radiolec- trique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

Radio frequency radiation exposure in- formation:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Starting and driving 5-147

Cet quipement est conforme aux lim- ites dexposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl.

Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 30 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps.

FCC Notice

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the I-FCW system could result in serious injury or death.

The I-FCW system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The I-FCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane. The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor 1

located on the front of the vehicle to mea- sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

LSD3293

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (I-FCW)

5-148 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB system warning light

LSD3282

Starting and driving 5-149

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION The I-FCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If there is a potential risk of a forward colli- sion, the I-FCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection in- dicator, and sounding an audible alert.

LSD2263

5-150 Starting and driving

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM ON/OFF Perform the following steps to turn the I-FCW system ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Emergency Brake and press the OK button.

3. Select Front and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The I-FCW system will be automati- cally turned on when the engine is restarted.

The I-FCW system is integrated into the AEB system. There is not a sepa- rate selection in the vehicle informa- tion display for the I-FCW system. When the AEB is turned off, the I-FCW system is also turned off.

LSD3237

Starting and driving 5-151

I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS Illustration A

LSD2312

5-152 Starting and driving

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

The I-FCW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:

Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway

Oncoming vehicles

Crossing vehicles

(Illustration A) The I-FCW system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.

The radar sensor may not detect a ve- hicle ahead in the following conditions:

Snow or heavy rain

Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.

Interference by other radar sources.

Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.

Driving in a tunnel

(Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.

(Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.

Illustration B LSD2265

Starting and driving 5-153

(Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

The system is designed to automati- cally check the sensors functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of ob- struction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.

Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

5-154 Starting and driving

Illustration C LSD2266

Starting and driving 5-155

Illustration D LSD2313

5-156 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer- ence from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the I-FCW system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the I-FCW system will resume automati- cally.

Condition B

When there is inclement weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) blocking the front radar sensor, the I-FCW system will automatically be canceled, the chime will sound and the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message will ap- pear in the vehicle information display.

LSD3238

Starting and driving 5-157

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, the warning message will no longer be available in the vehicle infor- mation display. If the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C

When the radar sensor of the front bumper is covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, etc., or is obstructed, the I-FCW system will auto- matically be canceled. The chime will sound and the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Tempo- rarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warn- ing message will appear in the vehicle in- formation display.

Action to take:

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the

Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or For- ward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition D

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snowfields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the Not Available: Front Radar Blocked or Forward Driving Aids Temporarily Disabled Front Sensor Blocked message.

Action to take:

When the above driving conditions no lon- ger exist, turn the system back on.

NOTE:

If the AEB system stops working, the I-FCW system will also stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB system warning light (or- ange) will illuminate and the warning mes- sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the I-FCW sys- tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD3695

5-158 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The sensor 1 is located on the front of the vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper/emblem clean.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.

Do not cover or attach stickers or simi- lar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.

Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restor- ing the front bumper, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users author- ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer- ence,

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LSD3293

Starting and driving 5-159

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use of the I-DA system could result in serious injury or death.

The IDA system is only a warning to inform the driver of a potential lack of driver attention or drowsiness. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control.

The IDA system does not detect and provide an alert of the drivers lack of attention or fatigue in every situation.

It is the drivers responsibility to:

stay alert,

drive safely,

keep the vehicle in the traveling lane,

be in control of the vehicle at all times,

avoid driving when tired,

avoid distractions (texting, etc).

The IDA system helps alert the driver if the system detects a lack of attention or driv- ing fatigue.

The system monitors driving style and steering behavior over a period of time, and it detects changes from the normal pattern. If the system detects that driver attention is decreasing over a period of time, the system uses audible and visual warnings to suggest that the driver take a break.

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS SYSTEM OPERATION If the system detects driver fatigue or that driver attention is decreasing, the mes- sage Take a break? appears in the vehicle information display and a chime sounds when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h). The system continuously monitors driver attention and can provide multiple warn- ings per trip. The system resets and starts reassessing driving style and steering behavior when the ignition switch is cycled from the ON to the OFF position and back to the ON position.

LSD3239

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA)

5-160 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the IDA system.

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Driver Attention Alert and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

NOTE:

The setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

LSD3218

Starting and driving 5-161

INTELLIGENT DRIVER ALERTNESS (I-DA) SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the IDA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

The I-DA system may not operate properly and may not provide an alert in the following conditions: Poor road conditions such as an

uneven road surface or pot holes. Strong side wind. If you have adopted a sporty driving

style with higher cornering speeds or higher rates of acceleration.

Frequent lane changes or changes to vehicle speed.

The IDA system will not provide an alert in the following conditions: Vehicle speeds lower than 37 mph

(60 km/h). Short lapses of attention.

Instantaneous distractions such as dropping an object.

System malfunction If the Intelligent Driver Alertness system malfunctions, the system warning mes- sage will appear in the vehicle information display and the function will be stopped automatically.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the system warning message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to ob- tain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may re- sult in shortened engine life and re- duced engine performance.

Avoid driving for long periods at con- stant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

Avoid quick starts.

Avoid hard braking as much as pos- sible.

LIC3125

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

5-162 Starting and driving

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application

Avoid rapid starts and stops.

Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible.

Maintain constant speed while com- muting and coast whenever pos- sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops.

Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your num- ber of stops.

Maintaining a steady speed can mini- mize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds

Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load.

Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.

Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis- tances

Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel effi- ciency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.

Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces un- necessary braking.

Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.

Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.

Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling

Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 3060 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruis- ing speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Starting and driving 5-163

9. Winter Warm Up

Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy.

Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil be- fore driving.

Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper- ating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever pos- sible.

When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C sys- tem.

Keep your engine tuned up.

Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.

Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, refer to Engine oil and oil filter recommenda- tions in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys- tem while the engine is running, messages are displayed in the meter.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)

5-164 Starting and driving

If the AWD error warning message is dis- played, there may be a malfunction in the AWD system. Reduce vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

The AWD high temperature message may be displayed while trying to free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driving mode may change to 2-wheel drive. If this message is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the message turns off, you can continue driving.

The tire size message may be displayed if there is a large difference between the di- ameters of front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn.

If any warning messages continue to be displayed, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

LSD3252 LSD3253 LSD3254

Starting and driving 5-165

WARNING Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires. Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control, even with AWD engaged.

For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at- tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious personal injury or vehicle damage.

Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna- mometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure that you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle move- ment which could result in serious per- sonal injury or vehicle damage.

CAUTION Do not operate the engine on a free

roller when any of the wheels are raised.

If you use the free roller, rotate four wheels with the same speed without raising any wheels.

If an AWD warning message is dis- played while driving there may be a malfunction in the AWD system. Re- duce the vehicle speed immediately and have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

The powertrain may be damaged if you continue driving when the AWD temperature or tire size incorrect messages are displayed

If the AWD high temperature message is displayed while you are driving, pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine. The driving mode will change to 2WD to prevent the AWD system from malfunctioning. If the warning message turns off, you can drive again.

If the tire size incorrect message is displayed while you are driving, pull off the road in a safe area with the engine idling. Check that all tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not ex- cessively worn.

If a warning message continues to be displayed after the above operations, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

5-166 Starting and driving

WARNING Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far for- ward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

Do not leave children unattended in- side the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in se- rious accidents.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assis- tance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera- ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po- sition.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB A :

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-167

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB B :

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB C :

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

WARNING If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as- sist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine run- ning, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be much harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The power steering system is designed to provide power assistance while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated re- peatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power as- sist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is re- duced, steering wheel operation will be- come heavy. If the steering wheel opera- tion is still performed, the power steering may stop and the power steering warning light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop

the engine and place the ignition switch in the OFF position. The temperature of the power steering system will go down after a period of time and the power assist level will return to normal after starting the en- gine. The power steering warning light will go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel operations that could cause the power steering system to overheat.

You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle when the steering wheel is oper- ated. This is a normal operational noise and is not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illumi- nates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servic- ing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illu- minates with the engine running, the power assist for the steering will cease op- eration but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering efforts are required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

POWER STEERING

5-168 Starting and driving

The brake system has two separate hy- draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- sure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac- celerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power as- sist for the brakes will not work. Brak- ing will be harder.

Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be lon- ger and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking perfor- mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain ve- hicle control during braking on slip- pery surfaces. Remember that stop- ping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal sur- faces even with ABS. Stopping dis- tances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

Tire type and condition may also af- fect braking effectiveness.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-169

When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.

When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For ad- ditional information, refer to Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer infor- mation section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in- cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self- test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a mal- function. If the computer senses a mal- function, it switches the ABS off and illumi- nates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the ve- hicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper- ates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres- sure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa- tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is op- erating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are haz- ardous and extra care is required while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.

5-170 Starting and driving

WARNING The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the drivers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:

Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non- slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control func- tion).

Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions:

Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol- low the steered path despite in- creased steering input)

Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it can- not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv- ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes to note the following:

The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indi- cates that the VDC system is working properly.

Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

For additional information, refer to Slip in- dicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light comes on in the instrument panel. The VDC system auto- matically turns off when the indicator light is on. The vehicle information display is used to turn off the VDC system. When the VDC system is turned off, the indicator light and if so equipped, the RAB system warning light, AEB system warning light

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-171

and AEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminate to indicate the VDC, AEB, AEB with Pedestrian Detection, and RAB systems are off. When the VDC system is turned off in the vehicle information display, the VDC sys- tem still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non-slipping drive wheel. The in- dicator light flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the indica- tor light will not flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to ON when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea- ture that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle for- ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- tion of a malfunction.

WARNING The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and al- ways drive carefully.

Do not modify the vehicles suspen- sion. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.

If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both the and indicator lights may illuminate.

If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- tremely deteriorated, both the and the indicator lights may illuminate.

When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked cor- ners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

5-172 Starting and driving

If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.

The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and al- ways drive carefully.

Do not modify the vehicles suspen- sion. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.

If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- tremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both the and indicator light may illuminate.

If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are ex- tremely deteriorated, both the and the indicator light may illuminate.

When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked cor- ners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.

The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

Starting and driving 5-173

The chassis control is an electric control module that includes the following func- tions:

Intelligent Trace Control

Active Ride Control

INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL (I-TC) This system senses driving based on the drivers steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.

The I-TC can be set to on (enabled) or off (disabled) through the vehicle information display Settings page. For additional infor- mation, refer to Vehicle information dis- play in the Instruments and controls sec- tion of this manual.

When the VDC system is turned off, the I-TC is also turned off.

WARNING The I-TC may not be effective depend- ing on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the I-TC is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the I-TC is operating properly.

Even if the I-TC is turned off, some functions will remain on to assist the driver (for ex- ample, avoidance scenes).

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC) This system senses upper body motion (based on wheel speed information) and controls engine torque and four wheel brake pressure. This will enhance ride com- fort in effort to restrain uncomfortable up- per body movement when passing over undulated road surfaces. This system comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the VDC system is turned off, the ARC is also turned off.

When the ARC is operating, you may hear noise and sense slight deceleration. This is normal and indicates that the ARC is oper- ating properly.

WARNING Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. De- press the brake pedal when the ve- hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es- pecially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling back- wards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.

The hill start assist system is not de- signed to hold the vehicle at a stand- still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling back- wards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to de- press the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Fail- ure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

CHASSIS CONTROL HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

5-174 Starting and driving

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the ve- hicle from rolling backward in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator.

The hill start assist system will operate au- tomatically under the following conditions:

The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.

The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. The maxi- mum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.

The hill start assist system will not operate when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neu- tral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level road.

The RSS sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.

When the DISPLAY key is on, the sonar view will automatically appear in the touch-screen display. An additional view of the sonar status will appear in the vehicle information display for reference.

WARNING The RSS is a convenience but it is not a

substitute for proper parking.

The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other ma- neuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.

Read and understand the limitations of the RSS as contained in this section. The colors of the corner sonar indica- tor and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate different distances to the object.

Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a trucks compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large station- ary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.

LSD3247

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-175

The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

The system may not detect the fol- lowing objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of ob- stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clean the sensors with sharp ob- jects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION The system informs with a visual and au- dible alert of rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. Sonar Operation Table

RR Sensor Range Sound Display

R o o o Display/Beep when detect Display on camera view x No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec- onds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle gets away from the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

5-176 Starting and driving

When the corner of the vehicle moves closer to an object, the corner sonar indi- cator A appears. When the center of the vehicle moves close to an object, the cen- ter sonar indicator B appears.

The system indicators A will appear when the vehicle moves closer to an object.

LSD3246 LSD2137

Starting and driving 5-177

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SONAR SYSTEM The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system:

1. Press the button until Settings displays in the vehicle information dis- play. Use the button to select Driver Assistance. Then press the OK button.

2. Select Parking Aids and press the OK button.

3. Select Rear and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.

Select Auto Show Sonar to display the parking sensor in the vehicle in- formation display when the sonar system activates.

Select Distance to change the so- nar system distance to Long, Me- dium or Short.

LSD3240

5-178 Starting and driving

SONAR LIMITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in seri- ous injury or death.

Read and understand the limitations of the sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the sonar sys- tem; this may include reduced perfor- mance or a false activation.

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti- vated at lower speeds.

Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a trucks compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. Always move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper or on the ground.

The system may not detect the fol- lowing objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When sonar blockage is detected, the sys- tem will be deactivated automatically.

The system is not available until the condi- tions no longer exist.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi- tion may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sen- sors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

Starting and driving 5-179

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The sonar sensors 1 are located on the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the sonar sensors clean.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem- porary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- structing the sonar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar- ent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the sonar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before in- serting it into the key hole or use the re- mote keyless entry function on the Intelli- gent Key.

ANTIFREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check the antifreeze to assure proper win- ter protection. For additional information, refer to Engine cooling system in the Do- it-yourself section of this manual.

BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, refer to Battery in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

LSD3241

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-180 Starting and driving

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ- ing the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing engine coolant in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially re- duced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian prov- inces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before install- ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, refer to Tire chains in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:

A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- move ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- drifts.

Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or grip un- der these conditions. Try to avoid driv- ing on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or down- shifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

Starting and driving 5-181

Do not use the cruise control on slip- pery roads.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20F (-7C) or lower.

WARNING Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Disconnect and properly store the en- gine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten- sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 24 hours, de- pending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

5-182 Starting and driving

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION This system uses microphones 1 located inside the vehicle to detect engine boom- ing noise. The system then automatically generates a noise canceling sound through the speakers and woofer (if so equipped) to reduce engine booming noise.

NOTE:

To operate the active noise cancellation system properly:

Do not cover the speakers or woofer (if so equipped).

Do not cover the microphones.

Do not change or modify speakers in- cluding the woofer (if so equipped) and any audio related components such as the amplifier.

Do not make any modification includ- ing sound deadening or modifica- tions around the microphones or speakers.

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT Active sound enhancement enhances ex- isting engine sounds according to the en- gine speed and driving modes through the speakers and woofer (if so equipped).

Front Microphone LSD3242

Rear Microphones LSD3261

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION/ ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-183

MEMO

5-184 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emer- gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

Do not use the hazard warning flash- ers while moving on the highway un- less unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the follow- ing procedure:

Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pres- sure Monitoring system (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is signifi- cantly under-inflated. If equipped, the sys- tem also displays pressure of all tires (ex- cept the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is in- stalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will ac- tivate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi- tional information, refer to Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

WARNING Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influ- ences before use.

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sud- den steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- ing with under-inflated tires may per- manently damage the tires and in- crease the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label to turn the low tire pres- sure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjust- ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly in- flated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pres- sure warning light will flash for ap- proximately one minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pres- sure sensors.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:

Stopping the vehicle 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assis- tance personnel that you need assis- tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve- hicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted into P (Park).

Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro- fessional road assistance.

A. Blocks B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2142

6-4 In case of emergency

Getting the spare tire and tools Open the trunk. Lift the luggage floor. Re- move the wheel nut wrench 1 and the jack 2 from the storage cover 3 . Then remove the tool storage cover 3 to access the spare tire.

Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Remove the spare tire.

Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)

CAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 1 as illustrated. Apply cloth 2 between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.

LCE2434 WCE0067 SCE0630

In case of emergency 6-5

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

WARNING Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec- essary to work under the vehicle, sup- port it with safety stands.

Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the jack.

Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.

Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the ve- hicle to move.

Jack-up point LCE2435

6-6 In case of emergency

Always refer to the illustration for the cor- rect placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following in- structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head be- tween the two notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.

NOTE:

Do not place jack on the notches be- tween the front most and rear most jack- ing points.

The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.

LCE0020

In case of emergency 6-7

Installing the spare tire The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated (A , B , C , D , E ) until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illus- trated (A , B , C , D , E ). Lower the ve- hicle completely.

WARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.)

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 Nm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recom- mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication inter- val.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres- sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire Load and Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire in the tire well and jacking equipment in the vehicle.

NOTE:

Remove the center wheel cap before storing the flat tire.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WCE0056

6-8 In case of emergency

WARNING Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can be- come dangerous projectiles in an ac- cident or sudden stop.

The spare tire is designed for emer- gency use. For additional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do- it-yourself section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with any- thing, immediately flush the con- tacted area with water.

Keep battery out of the reach of children.

The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

Whenever working on or near a bat- tery, always wear suitable eye protec- tors (for example, goggles or indus- trial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jew- elry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.

Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-9

WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause per- sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve- hicle, position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces- sary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the se- quence illustrated (A , B , C , D ).

CAUTION Always connect positive () to posi-

tive () and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) not to the battery.

Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ig- nition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully dis- connect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

LCE2223

6-10 In case of emergency

CAUTION Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en- gine damage or a vehicle fire.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radia- tor cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is com- ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap- ply the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air condi- tioner temperature control to maxi- mum hot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood fur- ther until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If cool- ant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cool- ing fan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-11

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant res- ervoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant res- ervoir tank if necessary. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin- cial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom- mends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following pre- cautions:

WARNING Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condi- tion. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.

Always attach safety chains before towing.

For additional information, refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer in- formation section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi- tional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-12 In case of emergency

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION Never tow All-Wheel Drive (AWD) mod- els equipped with a Continuously Vari- able Transmission (CVT) with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission.

LCE2433

In case of emergency 6-13

Two-Wheel Drive models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION Never tow Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the trans- mission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised al- ways use towing dollies under the front wheels.

When towing Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the rear wheels on the ground or on tow- ing dollies:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by plac- ing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

WARNING To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:

Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.

LCE2369

6-14 In case of emergency

Tow chains or cables must be at- tached only to main structural mem- bers of the vehicle.

Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.

Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturers instructions.

Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the ve- hicle. Never pull at an angle.

Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device de- signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- ways follow the manufacturers instruc- tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.

Shift back and forth between R (Re- verse) and D (Drive).

Apply the accelerator as little as pos- sible to maintain the rocking motion.

Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-4 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Power moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:

After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- age from acid rain.

After driving on coastal roads.

When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.

When dust or mud builds up on the sur- face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve- hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- face when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION Do not concentrate water spray di-

rectly on the sonar sensors (if so equipped) on the bumper as this will result in damage to the sensors. Do not use pressure washers capable of spraying water over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) to wash your vehicle. Use of high-pressure washers over 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in dam- age to or removal of paint or graphics. Avoid using a high-pressure washer closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the vehicle. Always use a wide-angle nozzle only, keep the nozzle moving and do not concentrate the water spray on any one area.

Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, es- pecially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle compo- nents, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical de- tergents, gasoline or solvents.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There- fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath- ered appearance before re-applying wax.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to assist you in choosing the proper product.

Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions sup- plied with the wax.

Do not use a wax containing any abra- sives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol- ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid last- ing damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regu- larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspen- sion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high- mounted stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the high-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

1. Push downward on the plastic shelf around the stop light 1 , lift upwards on the stop light, releasing it from the shelf 2 .

LAI2116

Appearance and care 7-3

2. Once it is released from the shelf, gently pull the stop light towards the rear seatback 3 .

The high-mounted stop light must be properly reinstalled before driving your ve- hicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- mal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

To reinstall the high-mounted stop light, reverse steps 3 , then 2 .

CAUTION When cleaning the inside of the win- dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- age the electrical conductors, radio an- tenna elements or rear window defog- ger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped) Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, espe- cially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:

Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.

Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discolor- ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap- plied to the tires, it may react with the coat- ing and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:

Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.

Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be diffi- cult to remove).

Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- mended by the tire dressing manufac- turer.

7-4 Appearance and care

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur- faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classifi- cation sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and re- sult in serious personal injury.

CAUTION Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol- ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based clean- ers as they may damage the leathers natural finish.

Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precau- tions:

Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that al- lows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.

Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur- ers instructions before using the air fresh- eners.

POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped) The sunshade is made from a tricot mate- rial.

CAUTION To help prevent damaging the moon- roof while cleaning:

Do not rub the material with a cloth. Doing so can damage the surface of the material or cause a stain to spread.

Never use benzine, thinner or any similar chemical to clean the sun- shade. This may discolor the moon- roof and damage the surface.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-5

Clean water based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to re- move as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.

Clean oil based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth damp- ened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:

NEVER place a floor mat on top of an- other floor mat in the driver front po- sition or install them upside down or backwards.

Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are spe- cifically designed for use in your ve- hicle model and model year.

Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat position- ing aid. For additional information, re- fer to "Floor mat installation" in this section.

Make sure the floor mat does not in- terfere with pedal operation.

Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.

After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular clean- ing and replaced if they become exces- sively worn.

Floor mat installation Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po- sitioning aids. The number and shape of the floor mat positioning aid for each seat- ing position varies depending on the ve- hicle.

LAI2094

7-6 Appearance and care

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the positioning aids.

2. Secure the grommet holes into the po- sitioning aids and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter- fere with pedal operation. With the igni- tion still in the OFF position, the shift lever in the P (Park) position and with the parking brake applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal opera- tion or prevent the pedal from return- ing to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning aids.

SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com- pletely in the shade before using them. For additional information, refer to Seat belt maintenance in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual.

WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may se- verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

Positioning aids LAI2046

Appearance and care 7-7

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

The accumulation of moisture- retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those ar- eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.

Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.

Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumula- tion.

Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart- ment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic com- ponents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Changing engine oil and oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39

When performing any inspection or main- tenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- lowing are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the ve- hicle from moving. Move the shift le- ver to P (Park).

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.

If you must work with the engine run- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jew- elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be- fore working on your vehicle.

Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, al- ways disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

If you must run the engine in an en- closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is neces- sary to work under the vehicle, sup- port it with safety stands.

Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.

On gasoline engine models, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

CAUTION Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Al- ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

Never leave the engine or the trans- mission related component harness connector disconnected while the ig- nition switch is in the ON position.

Never connect or disconnect the bat- tery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This Do-it-yourself section gives instruc- tions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, refer to Owners Manual/Service Manual order information in the Technical and con- sumer information section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

KR20DDET engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Drive belt location 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Battery 6. Fuse/Fusible link box 7. Air cleaner 8. Radiator cap 9. Engine oil dipstick 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3260

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

PR25DD engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Drive belt location 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Battery 7. Fuse/Fusible link box 8. Air cleaner 9. Radiator cap 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI3261

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con- tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi- tional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional informa- tion on precautions, refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

The radiator is equipped with a pres- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- gine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, trans- mission and/or cooling system.

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- diluted to provide antifreeze protec- tion to -34 F (-37 C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your ve- hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen- trate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol- low the coolant manufacturers in- structions to maintain minimum anti- freeze protection to -34 F (-37 C). The use of other types of coolant solu- tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or equivalent coolant), including Genu- ine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill cool- ant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level B , add coolant to the MAX level A .

If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level A . Start the engine and allow the engine coolant tem- perature gauge to rise until it reaches nor-

mal operating temperature. For additional information, refer to Engine coolant tem- perature gauge in the Instruments and controls section of this manual. Turn off the engine once the engine coolant tem- perature has reached normal operating range. Allow the engine coolant to cool to ambient temperature. Recheck the cool- ant level in the reservoir and add coolant to the MAX level if necessary.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex- pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life ex- pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad- ditional information, refer to the "Mainte- nance and schedules" section of this manual.

For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to En- gine compartment check locations in this section.

If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine over- heating.

WARNING To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid es- caping from the radiator.

Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop- erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI3262

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and L (Low) marks B . This is the normal operating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark A , remove the oil filler cap and pour rec- ommended oil through the opening. Do not fill oil level above H (High) mark C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the sever- ity of operating conditions.

KR20DDET engine LDI3263

PR25DD engine LDI3264 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi- cient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not cov- ered by warranty.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER For additional information on engine oil and oil filter change, refer to the instruc- tions outlined in this section.

Vehicle set-up 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat- ing temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for 15 min- utes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.

Place the safety jack stands under the vehicle jack-up points.

A suitable adapter should be attached to the jack stand saddle.

CAUTION Make sure the correct lifting and sup- port points are used to avoid vehicle damage.

1 Oil filler cap LDI3369

8-8 Do-it-yourself

2 Oil drain plug (KR20DDET) LDI3376

2 Oil drain plug (PR25DD) LDI3370

3 Oil filter (KR20DDET) LDI3377

Do-it-yourself 8-9

Removal of undercover 1. Remove pins A and undercover.

Engine oil and filter 1. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug and oil filter.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

3 Oil filter (PR25DD) LDI3371

4 Undercover LDI3372 LDI3267

8-10 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.

WARNING Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting sur- face with a clean rag.

CAUTION Be sure to remove any old gasket mate- rial remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage.

The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dip- stick hole when filling the engine with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten ad- ditionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque: 11 to 15 ft-lb (14.7 to 20.6 Nm)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque: 22 to 29 ft-lb (29.4 to 39.2 Nm)

9. Refill the engine with the recom- mended oil through the oil filler open- ing, and install the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information about drain and refill capacity, refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion of this manual. The drain and refill ca- pacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for ref-

erence only. Always use the dipstick to de- termine the proper amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage around the drain plug and the oil filter. Correct as required. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add en- gine oil if necessary.

After the operation 1. Reinstall undercover in reverse order of

removal.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

3. Reset the oil control system (if so equipped) and oil and filter mainte- nance reminder. For additional infor- mation, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and con- trols" section of this manual.

Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

Check your local regulations.

Do-it-yourself 8-11

CAUTION NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.

Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam- age the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recom- mended is not covered under NISSANs New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as rec- ommended is not covered under NISSANs New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information on brake fluid specification, refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion of this manual.

WARNING Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can dam- age the brake system and affect the vehicles stopping ability.

Clean the filler cap before removing.

Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked contain- ers out of reach of children.

CAUTION Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake fluid is below the MIN line B , the brake warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX line A . For addi- tional information on recommended type of brake fluid, refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3270

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

8-12 Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the Low Washer Fluid warning (if so equipped) appears in the vehicle informa- tion display.

To check the fluid level with the dip tube, use your finger to plug the center hole A of the cap/tube assembly, then remove it from the reservoir. If there is no fluid in the dip tube, add fluid.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mix- ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

WARNING Antifreeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint.

Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen- trates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concen- trates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers rec- ommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield- washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

LDI3271

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-13

Caution symbols for battery WARNING

1 No smoking, No exposed flames, No Sparks

Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

2 Shield eyes Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.

3 Keep away from children Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

4 Battery acid

Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-

tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.

5 Note operating instructions Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.

6 Explosive gas Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

BATTERY

8-14 Do-it-yourself

If the battery is labeled do not open it is maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the batterys performance.

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of bak- ing soda and water.

Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the nega- tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery dis- charge and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec- tronic accessories that consume bat- tery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy- drogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul- furic acid can cause blindness or in- jury. After touching a battery or bat- tery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with wa- ter for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Keep battery out of the reach of children.

Do not tip the battery.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery.

This battery is not equipped with remov- able vent caps.

JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, refer to Jump starting in the In case of emergency sec- tion of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice.

CAUTION Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by- pass the variable voltage control sys- tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.

Use electrical accessories with the en- gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system mea- sures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage gen- erated by the generator.

The current sensor is located near the bat- tery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

LDI3302 LDI3272

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

8-16 Do-it-yourself

1. Automatic tensioner pulley 2. Generator pulley 3. Water pump pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley 5. Crankshaft pulley

WARNING Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace iridium- tipped A spark plugs as frequently as con- ventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the Maintenance and sched- ules section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with rec- ommended or equivalent ones.

WDI0638 SDI1895

DRIVE BELT SPARK PLUGS

Do-it-yourself 8-17

WARNING Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION Be sure to use the correct socket to re- move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE:

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused.

Replace the air cleaner filter according to the maintenance log shown in the Mainte- nance and schedules section of this manual.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner cover upward.

Remove the air cleaner filter.

Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

The viscous paper type filter element (if so equipped) should not be cleaned and re- used. The dry paper type filter element (if so equipped) may be cleaned and reused. Re- place the air filter according to the mainte- nance log shown in the Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner filter, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips.

WARNING Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isnt there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

LDI3273

AIR CLEANER

8-18 Do-it-yourself

Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual for change intervals.

If replacement is required, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other mate- rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your wind- shield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter- gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa- ter. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol- low the procedure below:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind- shield.

2. Push the release tab B .

3. Move the wiper blade A down and re- move.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

5. Push wiper on to windshield.

LDI2757

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Do-it-yourself 8-19

CAUTION After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be care- ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle D . This may cause clogging or improper windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin C .

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice.

Self-adjusting brakes Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self- adjust every time the brake pedal is ap- plied.

WARNING Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

LDI2731

BRAKES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is nor- mal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information re- garding brake inspections, refer to the ap- propriate maintenance schedule informa- tion in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

If any electrical equipment does not oper- ate, check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger and en- gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro- vided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic con- trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

LDI2997 LDI3274

FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-21

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open A , replace it with a new fuse B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec- trical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not oper- ate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- perage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

LDI3200 LDI3275

8-22 Do-it-yourself

If any electrical equipment does not oper- ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are in the OFF posi- tion.

2. Remove the fuse box cover A with a suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam- aging the trim.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller B .

4. If the fuse is open C , replace it with an equivalent good fuse D .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec- trical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3276 LDI3203

Do-it-yourself 8-23

CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swal- low the battery or removed parts.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver A into the slit B of the corner and twist it to sepa- rate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.

Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.

Hold the battery by the edges. Hold- ing the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the stor- age capacity.

Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the case.

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-24 Do-it-yourself

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with C and D .

5. Operate the buttons to check the op- eration.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service if you need assis- tance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must ac- cept any interference, including interfer- ence that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

HEADLIGHTS For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb (if so equipped) The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halo- gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without remov- ing the headlight assembly.

If headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION Aiming is not necessary after replac-

ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WDI0568

LIGHTS

Do-it-yourself 8-25

Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.

Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass enve- lope. Touching the glass could signifi- cantly affect bulb life and/or head- light performance.

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if so equipped) If LED headlight bulb replacement is re- quired, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions out- lined in this section.

Replacing the LED fog light bulb If LED fog light bulb replacement is re- quired, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

8-26 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)* Low (Halogen) 55 H11 High (Halogen)/Daytime running (Canada only) 60 HB3

Side marker 5 W5W Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

Low/High Park/Daytime running Side marker

Fog light (if so equipped)* Turn signal/park (if so equipped) light* 28/8 7444NA Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* Step light (if so equipped) 3.8 194 Map light* 8 Vanity mirror light* 1.8 Courtesy light (if so equipped)* Glove box light* 1 Personal light* 8 Trunk light 3.4 158 High-mounted stop light* Rear combination light*

Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W Turn 21 W21W Side marker 5 W5W

Backup (reversing) assembly* Backup 16 921 Tail 5 W5W

License plate light* 5

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

1. Headlight assembly 2. Map light 3. Door mirror turn signal light

(if so equipped) 4. Step light (if so equipped) 5. Turn signal/park (if so equipped)

light 6. Fog light (if so equipped) 7. Personal light 8. High-mount stop light 9. Trunk light 10. License plate light 11. Backup (reversing) assembly 12. Rear combination light

LDI3277

8-28 Do-it-yourself

Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing.

Rear combination light

Bulb replacement requires the removal of the rear combination light assembly. If re- placement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice.WDI0306

Step light (if so equipped) LDI0341

Trunk light LDI2135

Do-it-yourself 8-29

If you have a flat tire, refer to Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WARNING Radio waves could adversely af- fect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medi- cal equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls sec- tion, Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- tem (TPMS) in the Starting and driv- ing section, and Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recom- mended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the "Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked regularly because: Most tires naturally lose air over

time. Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob- jects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, refer to TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-30 Do-it-yourself

If the tires are used at speeds above 100 mph (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race track for ex- ample), the cold tire inflation pres- sure must be increased. For addi- tional information, refer to Checking tire pressure in this section.

Set the tire pressure to the normal cold tire inflation pressure when the vehicle speed or load is reduced.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely af- fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- tion label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating condi- tions due to premature tire fail- ure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Load- ing beyond the specified capac- ity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

Increase the cold tire inflation pressure as indicated in "Check- ing tire pressure" in this section when using the tires specified by NISSAN above 100 mph (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so (on a race track for example). Failure to increase the cold tire inflation pressure may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. After such use, readjust tire pressure.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Impor- tant Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

Tire and Loading Information label

1 Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

2 Tire size refer to Tire labeling in this section.

3 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are consid- ered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The rec- ommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to pro- vide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveabil- ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi- cles GVWR.

4 Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

5 Spare tire size.

6 Vehicle load limit: Refer to Ve- hicle loading information in the Technical and consumer infor- mation section of this manual.

LDI2737

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure 1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, re- position the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Front and Rear Original Tire

215/60R16 220 kPa, 32 PSI

215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSI

235/40R19 230 kPa, 33 PSI

Spare Tire T135/90D16 420 kPa,

60 PSI

T135/70D16 420 kPa, 60 PSI

LDI0393

Do-it-yourself 8-33

TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufac- turers to place standardized infor- mation on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and de- scribes the fundamental character- istics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The P indicates the tire is de- signed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this informa- tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in milli- meters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tires ratio of height to width.

4. R: The R stands for radial. 5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

Example WDI0394

Example WDI0395

8-34 Do-it-yourself

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tires load in- dex. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can sup- port. You may not find this infor- mation on all tires because it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the De- partment Of Transportation. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturers identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size. 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional). 5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

Example LDI2786

Do-it-yourself 8-35

3 Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which in- clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth- ers.

4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.

5 Maximum load rating This number indicates the maxi- mum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, al- ways use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

6 Term of tubeless or tube type

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (tube type) or not (tubeless).

7 The word radial The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure.

8 Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown. Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particu- lar side that must always face out- ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and differential gears.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Infor- mation (Canada) in the Warranty In- formation Booklet.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION ONLY use spare tires specified for the

AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom- mended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

All season tires NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road condi- tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropri- ate in some areas.

Summer tires NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rat- ing to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- ings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud- ded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION Only certain SAE class S tire chains can be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong Class S chains on this vehicle will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables, you should use a tire chain that meets the mini- mum clearances for your vehicle.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac- cording to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufac- turers suggestions. Use a tire chain that is designed to provide the specified space A between the installed tire chain 1 and where the tire meets the rim 2 as shown on the chart.

NOTE:

Tire chains are not permitted for use with 19 in wheels.

Wheel size Minimum space required

16 in .7 in (17 mm)

17 in .2 in (4 mm)

A tire chain that provides the specified amount of space will provide the neces- sary clearance between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body com- ponent. The minimum clearances are de- termined using the factory-equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with tire chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

LDI0574

8-38 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES Tire rotation NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) for vehicles equipped with the PR25DD engine and 7,500 miles (12,000 km) for vehicles equipped with the KR20DDET engine.

For additional information on tire re- placing procedures, refer to Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 Nm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight- ened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure. Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Impor- tant Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

WDI0258

Do-it-yourself 8-39

Tire wear and damage 1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious per- sonal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Impor- tant Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carry- ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad- ditional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer infor- mation section of this manual.

WARNING The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, ground clear- ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer cali- bration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.

WDI0259

8-40 Do-it-yourself

If your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving condi- tions and cause an accident and per- sonal injury.

If the wheels are changed for any rea- son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimen- sion. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, de- grade vehicle handling characteris- tics, affect the VDC system and/or in- terference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pres- sure warning light will flash for ap- proximately 1 minute. The light will re- main on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Replacing tires with those not origi- nally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.

When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.

Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.

Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.

Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re- paired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

The use of retread tires is not recommended.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Infor- mation (Canada) in the Warranty In- formation Booklet.

Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety In- formation (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.

Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING The spare tire should be used for

emergency use only. It should be re- placed with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.

Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.

Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels).

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.

Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.

Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.

Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.

Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of general maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-6 Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Oil control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

PR25DD Engine model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11

Maintenance under severe operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

KR20DDET Engine model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Standard maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Maintenance under severe operating conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

PR25DD Engine model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 KR20DDET Engine model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- nance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance.

It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- sponsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE The maintenance items listed in this sec- tion are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- cialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through techni- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro- grams. They are fully qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.

If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Collision Center is located, or go to http://collision.nissanusa.com.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal- ers service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte- nance work, closely observe the Mainte- nance precautions in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with * is found in the Do-it- yourself section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is re- leased.

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrica- tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and in- stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: PR25DD Engine model; Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). KR25DDET Engine Model; Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- hicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer- ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high- way speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other dam- age. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recom- mended that you have a damaged wind- shield repaired by a NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate

a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked imme- diately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate prop- erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is rec- ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery dis- charge and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec- tronic accessories that consume bat- tery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- ately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional infor- mation, refer to Exhaust gas (carbon mon- oxide) in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these sub- stances, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accu- mulate. For additional information, refer to the Appearance and care section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day opera- tion. For additional information, refer to General maintenance in this section.

Items marked with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform mainte- nance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in- tervals are required.

When applicable, additional information can be found in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- ing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- proved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- ties in the Technical and consumer in- formation section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE: Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- vals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replac- ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For additional information on the proper mix- ture for your area, refer to Engine cooling system in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may re- duce the recommended service interval of the coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear- ance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose- ness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not re- quired. (in-tank type filter)

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or re- place parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE: Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immedi- ately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex- haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD)

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged peri- ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus- pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: PR25DD Engine model; Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under Explanation of general mainte- nance items in this section. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

KR20DDET Engine model; Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) ac- cording to the instructions under Explana- tion of general maintenance items in this section. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec- essary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil, and transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals.

Replace at specified intervals.

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- nance schedules that may be used, de- pending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the odometer reading will in- dicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be per- formed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Addi- tional maintenance items should be per- formed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:

Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).

Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- tures remaining below freezing.

Operating in hot weather in stop- and-go rush hour traffic.

Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- ing for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

Driving in dusty conditions.

Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.

Using a car-top carrier.

OIL CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with oil control system. It calculates engine oil and filter change intervals based on driving condi- tions. Driving in the following severe condi- tions will shorten the engine oil and filter change interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

How driving conditions affect OCS dis- play timing

PR25DD Engine model: Conditions Driving Scene Display timing

Light

Freeway driving City driving (flat/moderate hills) No towing or heavy loads No extended engine idling

Normal

Extreme

Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door- to-door delivery use. Using a car-top carrier. Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas. Sustained high speed driving.

Early

CAUTION If the oil replacement indicator is dis-

played, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

Operating your vehicle with deterio- rated oil can damage the engine.

If your oil replacement indicator re- sets prematurely or becomes inop- erative, please change the oil within six months or 5,000 miles (8,000 km) from your last oil change.

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

KR20DDET Engine model: Conditions Driving Scene Display timing

Light

Freeway driving City driving (flat/moderate hills) No towing or heavy loads No extended engine idling

Normal

Extreme

Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km). Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go rush hour traffic. Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door- to-door delivery use. Using a car-top carrier. Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas. Sustained high speed driving.

Early

CAUTION If the oil replacement indicator is dis-

played, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

Operating your vehicle with deterio- rated oil can damage the engine.

If your oil replacement indicator re- sets prematurely or becomes inop- erative, please change the oil within six months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km) from your last oil change.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

PR25DD ENGINE MODEL The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be re- quired. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace MAINTENANCE

OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

5 (8) 6

10 (16) 12

15 (24) 18

20 (32) 24

25 (40) 30

30 (48) 36

35 (56) 42

40 (64) 48

45 (72) 54

50 (80) 60

55 (88) 66

60 (96) 72

65 (104)

78

70 (112) 84

75 (120) 90

80 (128) 96

85 (136) 102

90 (144) 108

95 (152) 114

100 (160) 120

105 (168) 126

110 (176) 132

115 (184) 138

120 (192) 144

Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R R R Brake fluid R R R R R R Brake lines and cables I I I I I I I I I I I I Brake pads and rotors I I I I I I I I I I I I CVT fluid NOTE (2) I I I I I I I I I I I I Drive belt NOTE (3) I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I* I* Engine coolant* NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil and oil filter NOTE (6) R R R R R R R R R R R R EVAP vapor lines and fuel lines I* I* I* I* I* I* Exhaust system I I I I I I Fuel filter NOTE (7) Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models) I I I I I I I I I I I I

In-cabin microfilter R R R R R R R R Intake & exhaust valve clearance* NOTE (8) NISSAN Intelligent Key battery I R R R R R R R Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type) NOTE (9) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts

I I I I I I

Tire rotation NOTE (10) Transfer fluid & differential gear oil NOTE (11) I I I I I I I I I I I I

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

NOTE:

Maintenance items with should be performed more frequently according to Maintenance under severe driving conditions. (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (2) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). (3) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km). (7) Periodic maintenance is not required. (8) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. (9) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage. (10) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to General maintenance in the section (11) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

* Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- tures remaining below freezing.

Operating in hot weather in stop- and-go rush hour traffic.

Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- ing for long distance, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

Driving in dusty conditions.

Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.

Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months Brake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD model) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

KR20DDET ENGINE MODEL The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be re- quired. After 90,000 miles (144,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 3.75 (6) 6

7.5 (12) 12

11.25 (18) 18

15 (24) 24

18.75 (30) 30

22.5 (36) 36

26.25 (42) 42

30 (48) 48

33.75 (54) 54

37.5 (60) 60

41.25 (66) 66

45 (72) 72

Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R Brake fluid R R R Brake lines and cables I I I I I I Brake pads and rotors I I I I I I CVT fluid NOTE (2) I I I I I I Drive belt NOTE (3) I* I* I* Engine coolant* NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil and oil filter NOTE (6) R R R R R R EVAP vapor lines and fuel lines I* I* I* Exhaust system I I I Front drive shaft boots I I I I I I Fuel filter NOTE (7) In-cabin microfilter R R R R Intake & exhaust valve clearance* NOTE (8) NISSAN Intelligent Key battery I R R R Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type) NOTE (9) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts

I I I

Tire rotation NOTE (10)

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL 48.75 (78) 78

52.5 (84) 84

56.25 (90) 90

60 (96) 96

63.75 (102) 102

67.5 (108) 108

71.25 (114) 114

75 (120) 120

78.75 (126) 126

82.5 (138) 138

86.25 (138) 138

90 (144) 144

Air cleaner filter NOTE (1) R R Brake fluid R R R Brake lines and cables I I I I I I Brake pads and rotors I I I I I I CVT fluid NOTE (2) I I I I I I Drive belt NOTE (3) I* I* I* I* I* I* Engine coolant* NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil and oil filter NOTE (6) R R R R R R EVAP vapor lines and fuel lines I* I* I* Exhaust system I I I Front drive shaft boots I I I I I I Fuel filter NOTE (7) In-cabin microfilter R R R R Intake & exhaust valve clearance* NOTE (8) NISSAN Intelligent Key battery R R R R Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type) NOTE (9) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts

I I I

Tire rotation NOTE (10)

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

NOTE:

Maintenance items with should be performed more frequently according to Maintenance under severe driving conditions. (1) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (2) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). (3) After 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km). (7) Periodic maintenance is not required. (8) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. (8) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.049 in (1.25 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage. (9) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to General maintenance in the section

* Maintenance items and intervals with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera- tures remaining below freezing.

Operating in hot weather in stop- and-go rush hour traffic.

Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- ing for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

Driving in dusty conditions.

Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.

Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval Brake fluid Replace Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months Exhaust system Inspect Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months Front drive shaft boots Inspect Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

PR25DD ENGINE MODEL

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-19

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 120 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-21

KR20DDET ENGINE MODEL

3,750 Miles (6,000 km) or 6 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 12 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

11,250 Miles (18,000 km) or 18 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 24 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

18,750 Miles (30,000 km) or 30 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 36 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

26,250 Miles (42,000 km) or 42 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 48 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

33,750 Miles (54,000 km) or 54 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

9-22 Maintenance and schedules

37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 60 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

41,250 Miles (66,000 km) or 66 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 72 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

48,750 Miles (78,000 km) or 78 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 84 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

56,250 Miles (90,000 km) or 90 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 96 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

63,750 Miles (102,000 km) or 102 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

67,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 108 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-23

71,250 Miles (114,000 km) or 114 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 120 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

78,750 Miles (126,000 km) or 126 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 132 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

86,250 Miles (138,000 km) or 138 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 144 Months Retailer Name: Date: Mileage: Retailer Stamp:

9-24 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

When traveling or registering in another country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . 10-12 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Additional Data Recording (on vehicles equipped with optional ProPILOT Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Owners Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the Do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric

Measure US

Measure Imperial Measure

Fuel FWD: 61.3 L 16 1/4 gal 13 1/2 gal For additional information, refer to Fuel recommendation in

this section.AWD: 60.6 L 16 gal 13 3/8 gal

Engine oil*1 Drain and refill *1: For additional information, refer to Engine oil in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

PR25DD

With oil filter change 5.1 L 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt

Genuine Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN (or equivalent) is recommended. If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as rec- ommended is not covered under NISSANs New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section.

Without oil filter change 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt

KR20DDET

With oil filter change 4.7 L 5 qt 4-1/8 qt

Genuine Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN (or equivalent) is recommended. If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic SAE 5W-30 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Dam- age caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other then as recommended is not covered under NISSANs New Vehicle Lim- ited Warranty. For additional information, refer to Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section.

Without oil filter change 4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt

Engine coolant with reservoir

PR25DD 8.3 L 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalentKR20DDET 8.2 L 2-1/8 gal 1-3/4 gal

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric

Measure US

Measure Imperial Measure

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSANs New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Differential gear oil Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil.Transfer oil

Brake fluid Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3. Available in mainland U.S.A through a NISSAN dealer

Multi-purpose grease NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant HF0-1234yf (R-1234yf) For additional information, refer to Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in this section.

Air conditioning system oil

Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG (VC100YF oil) or equivalent For additional information, refer to Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 3.8 L 1 gal 7/8 gal Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or equivalent.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and sys- tems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Do not use fuel that contains the oc- tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and ve- hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- tent, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- lated gasoline.

U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- tified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbre- viation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission con- trol system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gaso- line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing re- formulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emis- sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use re- formulated gasoline when available.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.

The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop- erly formulated with appropriate co- solvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle per- formance problems. At this time, suf- ficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe- rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re- fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

E15 fuel E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula- tions require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percent- age for that region.

E85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve- hicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- tified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, in- cluding the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more de- tails.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex- ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active sol- vents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recom- mended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consump- tion or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your ve- hicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi- cation or International Lubricant Standard- ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos- ity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals.

LTI2303

Technical and consumer information 10-7

Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using en- gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recom- mended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:

repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures

driving in dusty conditions

extensive idling

stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG (VC100YF oil) or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air con- ditioning system and will require the re- placement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refriger- ant does not affect the earths atmo- sphere, certain government regulations re- quire the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air condi- tioner system service. Air conditioner sys- tem should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to ensure proper and

safe operation (SAE J2845). A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equip- ment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Only new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s) shall be used as replacement parts.

A damaged or leaking air conditioning evaporator shall never be repaired or re- placed with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. To replace a damaged or leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator(s). It is recom- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner sys- tem.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE

Model PR25DD KR20DDET

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline 4-cylinder, inline Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0)

when compression ratio = 8 in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1) when compression ratio = 14 in (mm) 3.307 x 3.500 (84.0 x 88.9)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 151.85 (2,488) when compression ratio = 8 cu in (cm3) 121.86 (1,997) when compression ratio = 14 cu in (cm3) 120.22 (1,970)

Firing order 1342 1342

Idle speed CVT in N (Neutral) position No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle

Spark plug DXE22H11C DILKAR7N9HG

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.035 (0.9)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 10-9

WHEELS AND TIRES Wheel type Size Offset in (mm) Steel 16 x 7.0J 1.77 (45) Aluminum 17 x 7.5J 1.97 (50) Aluminum 19 x 8.0J 2.17 (55) T-type (Steel spare) 16 x 4T 1.18 (30) Tire size 2.5 S model P215/60R16 2.5 SV/SL models P215/55R17 2.5 and 2.0 SR/Platinum models P235/40R19 Spare tire Temporary T135/70D16 Temporary T135/90D16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Unit: in (mm) Overall length without license plate bracket 192.9 (4,900) Overall width without mirrors 72.9 (1,852) Overall height at Base Curb Weight to Roof Metal

2.5 L with front wheel drive

USA S model 56.7 (1,440) Canada S model 56.7 (1,441) USA SV model 56.9 (1,444) Canada SV model 56.9 (1,445) USA / Canada SL model 56.9 (1,444) USA Platinum model 56.9 (1,445) Canada Platinum model 56.9 (1,446) USA SR model 56.9 (1,444) Canada SR model 56.9 (1,445)

with All-wheel drive USA / Canada S model 57.2 (1,452) USA / Canada SV and SL models 57.3 (1,456) USA / Canada Platinum model 57.4 (1,458) USA SR model 57.4 (1,458) Canada SR model 57.4 (1,459)

2.0 L USA Platinum model 56.9 (1,445) Canada Platinum model 56.9 (1,446) USA SR model 56.8 (1,443) Canada SR model 56.9 (1,444)

Front and Rear track 16 inch wheel 63.6 (1,615) 17 inch wheel 63.2 (1,605) 19 inch wheel 62.8 (1,595)

Wheelbase 111.2 (2,825) Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label on the center pillar between the drivers side front and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating Front lbs. (kg) Rear lbs. (kg)

10-10 Technical and consumer information

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve- hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gaso- line vehicles must be operated with un- leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, prov- ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an- other country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, trans- portation and registration are the re- sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re- sponsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number) The vehicle identification number is lo- cated as shown.

LTI2050 LTI2387

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 10-11

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi- cation label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

PR25DD LTI2381

KR20DDET LTI2328 WTI0172

10-12 Technical and consumer information

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is af- fixed to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0173 WTI0174 LTI2271

Technical and consumer information 10-13

To mount the front license plate, attach the license plate bracket to the bumper fascia at the location marks (small dimples) using the two provided screws A .

WARNING It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve- hicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight in- cluding: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other op- tional equipment. This informa- tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, pas- sengers, cargo, and trailer.

LTI2380

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maxi- mum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the ve- hicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be in- cluded as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information la- bel.

Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information la- bel. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Ca- pacity on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label. To get the combined weight of oc- cupants and cargo, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 10-15

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement The com- bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs. or XXX kg on your vehicles Tire and Loading Information la- bel.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For ex- ample, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your ve- hicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capac- ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.)Example

LTI2335

10-16 Technical and consumer information

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con- firm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi- tional information, refer to Measure- ment of weights in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional informa- tion, refer to Tire and Loading Infor- mation label in this section.

LOADING TIPS The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire fail- ure which could result in a seri- ous accident and personal in- jury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicles warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the ve- hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not ex- ceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle cer- tification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- ways tow forward, never backward.

Never tow your front wheel drive ve- hicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.

DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans- mission parts due to lack of transmis- sion lubrication.

For emergency towing procedures re- fer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicles drive wheels. Al- ways follow the dolly manufacturers rec- ommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- ity Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli- cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For ex- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low- est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- sent the tires ability to stop on wet pave- ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- mance.

WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include ac- celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high- est), B, and C, representing the tires resis- tance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor- mance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly in- flated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combi- nation, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- formation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War- ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In- formation Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War- ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Technical and consumer information 10-19

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na- tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a re- call and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other in- formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact- ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans- port Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN. If Transport Canada receives com- plaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canadas Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi- sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf- Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc- cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf- Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc- cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers) Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canadas Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers). To notify NISSAN of any safety con- cerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800- 387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10-20 Technical and consumer information

WARNING A vehicle equipped with All -Wheel Drive (AWD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equip- ment. Make sure you inform the test fa- cility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle move- ment which could result in serious ve- hicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve- hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re- paired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condi- tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicles inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is not ready. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi- tion is ready. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the ready con- dition or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain collision or near collision-like situa- tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Whether or not the driver and passen- ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better un- derstanding of the circumstances in which collisions and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial collision situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driv- ing conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and collision location) are recorded. However, other parties, such

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 10-21

as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally iden- tifying data routinely acquired during a col- lision investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- ment, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

ADDITIONAL DATA RECORDING (on vehicles equipped with optional ProPILOT Assist) If your vehicle is equipped with the optional ProPILOT Assist, it will also be equipped with supplemental data recording function intended to assist in understanding how ProPILOT Assist performs in certain non- trivial crash or near-crash scenarios. Spe- cifically, supplemental recording is de- signed to capture the following:

Driver operational status of the accel- erator, brakes, steering, etc.

Detection status of a vehicle ahead and lane markers

Vehicle information including distance to vehicle ahead and lateral position

Information on the operation of the ProPILOT Assist and other crash avoid- ance features

ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis information

External images from the multi-sensing front camera (Available only when the SRS air bag or IEB system is activated)

The ProPILOT Assist does not record con- versations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle.

To read this supplemental data, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the recording unit is needed. This supplemental data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permit- ted by law. If downloaded, NISSAN and third parties entrusted by NISSAN may use the data recorded for the purpose of improv- ing NISSANs vehicle safety performance.

NISSAN and third parties entrusted by NISSAN will not disclose/provide the re- corded data to a third party except:

- With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee

- In response to an official request from law enforcement, court order, governmental agency, or other legally enforceable re- quest

- For research purposes after the data is modified such that it is no longer tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner (anony- mized)

10-22 Technical and consumer information

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals can also be pur- chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu- ine NISSAN Owners Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num- ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep- resentative will assist you.

OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-23

MEMO

10-24 Technical and consumer information

11 Index A

Active noise cancellation Active sound enhancement. .5-183, 5-183

Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . . .5-174 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46 Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-67, 2-15 Air bag warning light, supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67, 2-15 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation. . . . .4-32, 4-37 Air conditioner specification label . .10-13 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-37 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-40

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-40 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164, 6-13 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-28 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-180 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . .5-169

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . .3-32, 3-33, 3-34 Automatic power window switch . . .2-63

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . .3-30 Automatic brake hold . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Automatic drive positioner . .3-32, 3-33, 3-34 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . .5-130 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) with Pedestrian Detection . . . . . . . . . . . .5-138 AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164, 6-13

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-180, 8-14 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . .8-24

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-16 Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . .5-44 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . .5-169 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-27 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-169 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Brake wear indicators. . . . . . .2-18, 8-20 Parking brake operation . . . . . . . .5-25 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-170 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-169 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-162 Brightness control

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-10 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . .10-14 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41 Chassis control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-174 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Child restraints . . . . . . .1-21, 1-22, 1-23, 1-26

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-31, 1-38, 1-43 Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . .7-2, 7-5 C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .10-12

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-180 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Controls Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-37

Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-62 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60

D

Daytime Running Light System . . . . . .2-50 Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-50 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Drive belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Drive positioner, Automatic. . .3-32, 3-33, 3-34 Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . .5-180

Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11

Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

E

E-call (SOS) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164 Emergency engine shutoff . . . . . . .5-15, 6-2 Emission control information label . . . .10-13 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-19 Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-6 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-6 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-12 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-182 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . .2-6 Event Data recorders. . . . . . . . .10-21, 10-22 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-4 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-56 Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59

F

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . .8-13

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-12 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Forward Driving Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

System Temporarily Unavailable . . . .5-81, 5-110, 5-135, 5-144, 5-157

Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-54 Front-door pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2

11-2

Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-164 Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . .3-25 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-4 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-35

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . .5-163 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Fusible links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal Transceiver . . .2-67, 2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-70, 2-71 Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

H

Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-45 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Heated seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-37 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-38

Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . .5-174 HomeLink Universal Transceiver . . .2-67, 2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-70, 2-71 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

I

Ignition switch Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-13

Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 5-16 Important vehicle information label . . .10-12 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . .5-164 Indicator

NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror. . . . .3-30 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-50 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-50 Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . . .4-11

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) . . .5-65 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . . .5-101 Intelligent Driver Alertness (I-DA) . . . . .5-160 Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-148 Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-14 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Warning signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Intelligent Lane Intervention (I-LI) . . . . .5-38 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . .5-174 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-16

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-24 Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-14

Keys NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . .3-2

11-3

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4

L

Label Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13

Labels Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12 Emission control information label . .10-13 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . .10-12 F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . .10-12 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-67

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . .5-33 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26 License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-14 Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-67, 2-15 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-27 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-10 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-27 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-45 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-45 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-66 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66

Lock Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-7 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-25 Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . .3-23

Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-35 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-14

M

Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4

Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . .9-7, 9-7 Maintenance under severe operation conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13, 9-18 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . .3-32, 3-33, 3-34 Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-50 Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-30 Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Moonroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64, 7-5 Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-23

N

NissanConnect Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 5-16

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5

11-4

Oil Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Outside mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Overhead sunglasses holder . . . . . . . .2-59 Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-11 Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-23 Owner's manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-23

P

Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-25 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . .5-168

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 2-16, 5-25 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-66 Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-168 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-62

Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-168

Precautions Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-31, 1-38, 1-43 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-31, 1-38, 1-43 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-12 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11

ProPILOT Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-89 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

R

Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-41

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21 Rear Automatic Braking (RAB) . . . . . . .5-124 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . .5-54 Rear Door Alert . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 2-38, 2-54 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Rear Sonar System (RSS) . . . . . . . . . .5-175 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Recorders

Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21, 10-22 Refrigerant recommendation. . . . . . . .10-8

Registering a vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-19, 5-17 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-20

S

Safety Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-7 Child seat belts . . . . . .1-23, 1-31, 1-38, 1-43 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-20

Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Front power seat adjustment . . . . . .1-4 Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Seat belt

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-22 Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-12 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12, 7-7 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-19 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-15

Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-14, 2-15 Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . . . .3-32, 3-33, 3-34

11-5

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5

Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 5-16 Security systems

Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-40 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20 Service manual order form. . . . . . . . .10-23 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-40 Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Shift lever lock release . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-19 Sonar

Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-175 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5 Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . .2-4 Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-66 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67 Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-171 Standard maintenance . .9-10, 9-11, 9-14, 9-15 Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-16 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-16 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4, 5-11 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Steering Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-168

Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) . . . . .2-54 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67, 2-15 Supplemental front impact air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-54 Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . .1-67 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46

Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-46 Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 Automatic power window switch . . .2-63 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-45 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-45 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-50 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 5-16 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4 Tilt

Telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-42 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-18 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10

Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5, 6-3 Towing

4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-18 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) . . . . . . . .5-30 Transceiver

HomeLink Universal Transceiver . . .2-67, 2-68, 2-69, 2-70, 2-70, 2-71

11-6

Transmission Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Transmission shift lever lock release . . .5-23 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4, 2-5 Trunk access through the rear seat .1-5, 3-24 Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-67 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-18 USB/iPod Charging Ports . . . . . . . . . .4-41

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-17 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . .10-10 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-171 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Vehicle immobilizer system. . . . . .2-42, 5-16

Vehicle information display . . . . . . . . .2-19 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-14 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-42, 5-16 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

W

Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-67, 2-15 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-11 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-12 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Loose fuel cap warning . . . . . . . . .2-35 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-14, 2-35 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-14, 2-15 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-67, 2-15 TPMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-40 Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-67

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . .10-10 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10

When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61

Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-62 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-62 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-62

Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Wiper

Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-43

11-7

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and sys- tems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Do not use fuel that contains the oc- tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and ve- hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- tent, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- lated gasoline.

U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- tified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbre- viation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

For additional information, refer to Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and consumer informa- tion section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: Refer to Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities in the Technical and con- sumer information section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE: For additional information, refer to Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the drivers door. For additional information, refer to Wheels and tires in the Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For ad- ditional information, refer to Break-in schedule in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Altima Nissan works, you can view and download the Nissan Altima v15 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Nissan Altima as well as other Nissan manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Nissan Altima. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Nissan Altima v15 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Nissan Altima v15 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Nissan Altima v15 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Nissan Altima v15 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Nissan Altima v15 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.